Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 321

WEEK 1

Date of preparing : 10/08/2012

Date of teaching:

REVIEW AND TEST

Period 1

I. The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary of English 7
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of 6 themes
+ Structures :
- The past simple, the future simple tenses
- Quantifiers
- Wh- questions
- So, too, either, neither
2. Skills: 4 skills
3 . Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be be honest
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 7-book, tests
2. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary in English 7
III. The stages of the lesson
1.The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

* Warm-up (2)
Listen and answer
Say hello to the students
How are you?
Today were going to review the main
grammar points and vocabulary of
English 7, then we are going to have a 10minute-test.
* Review(30)
- Ask ss to retell some forms and uses of
tenses that they have learnt in English 7 . - Listen and retell
+ Past simple tense.
(+) S + V(ed) ....
(?) Did + S + V-infi ... ?
(-) S + did + not + V-infi ...
1

+ Future simple tense


(+) S + will + V(infi)...
(?) Will + S + V(infi)... ?
(-) S + will not + V(infi)...
- Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss
Group 1 makes examples, use the past
discuss to make examples
simple tense.
- Remark and correct
Group 2 makes examples, use the future
simple tense.
- Ask the class to retell the words of
quantifiers and their use

+ Quantifiers
A, an, some, any, a little, a few, a lot
of(lots of), many, much

- Divide the class into 2 groups, and ask ss


discuss to complete the table
- Remark and correct
Quantifiers
a/an
some
any
a lot of
much
many
a few
a little

- Ask the class to retell the Wh-questions


Divide the class into 2 groups, and ask ss
to write on the board
- Remark and correct
- Ask the class to retell the use of 4
adverbs: so, too, either, neither
- Remark and correct

Singular

Plural

Uncountable
nouns

+ Wh-quetions
What, where, when, which, who, why,
how

Liten and answer

3. Test (10) : Circle the the best option to complete the sentences( 10 points)
1.Lan ........................... to Ha Long Bay last year.
A. go
B.went
C.goes
D. is going
2. Hoa ....................... to HCM city last month.
A. visited
B. visit
C.is visiting
D. to visit
3.I.............................. the floor tomorrow.
A. cleaned
B. clean
C. will clean
D. cleaning
2

4. I like soda.

A. So do I
B. I like it, either
C.Neither do I
5. There are oranges in the refrigerator
A. some
B. an
C. a little
6. They ....................... TV after work.
A. are watching
B. watch
C. watched
watch
7.Huong and Minh ...................soccer this morning.
A. didnt played
B. didnt plays
C. didnt play
playing
8. We ........................Ha Long Bay three years ago.
A. visit
B. visited
C. visits
9. is it from Sonla to Hanoi?
A. How
B. How long
C. How much
10. Can you me the way to the park?
A. answer
B. tell
C. talk
* Answer key
Sentence
Key

1
B

2
A

3
C

4
A

5
A

6
B

7
C

8
B

D. I am, too
D. much
D. will
D. didnt
D. to visit
D.How far
D. say
9
D

10
B

4. Homework: (2)
- Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 1: Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

Date of preparing : 10/08/2012

Period 2

Date of teaching:

UNIT 1 : MY FRIENDS
Lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Introduce onself and other people
- Describe something about someones appearance and characteristic
- Listen to dialogue for specific information
- Read passages for general or detailed information
- Write a passage about onself and the others
b. The aims of the lesson
3

+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue
about Hoas old friend Nien in Hue for general or detailed information
- Standard: Read and understand the passage to know about Nien and Hoa
- Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue
+ Vocabulary: receive(v) ; smile(v;n), look like (v); seem(v) ; enough(adv;adj)
+ Structures : - be(not) + adj+ enough+ to + V(infi)
- Past simple : regular and irregular verbs (review)
- Exclamations: What a lovely smile! (review)
- What does she look like? To ask about ones appearance
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary in English 7
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks:
write the favorite activities in your free
time

Students activities
* Networks:
3 groups play on the stage
play volleyball

read
chat

Favorit
e
activiti
es
play chess

Listen and answer


* Pre-reading(15)
- Do you have a lot of friends?
- Do you have any close friends ?
Discuss in groups and answer
- What do you like to do together?
Ask ss to look at the pictures of Hoa and
Nien and and present the situation of the
dialogue.
Nien- Hoas old friend in Hue is going to Look at the pictures and listen carefully
visit her at Christmas, today Hoa
4

received a letter from Nien, now she


talking to Lan about her
Present the new words

1.Vocabulary
receive (v)
smile (v;n)
look like (v)
seem(v)
enough (adv; adj)
Listen and repeat
Listen and check

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask some ss to read and correct the
mistake
Present the new structures
Make 2 examples on the board
Ask ss to repeat in chorus
Ask some ss to read and correct the
mistake

2. Structures
be(not) + adj+ enough+ to + V(infi)
Eg: 1. She wasnt old enough to be in my
class
2. He is tall enough to play volleyball
Listen and repeat
Listen and check

* While-reading(15)
Play the tape ( twice)
Ask students to practice the dialogue in
pairs.
Ask some pairs to practice
Ask students to read the dialogue again
to the find out the correct answers to the
questions (work in pairs)
Ask ss to give out their answers on the
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Give out the answer key

Listen carefully
Pairwork and check the information.

* Post-reading:(5)
Ask ss to summarize the dialogue

Individual work
Remark and correct

Listen and check


Read the text again to find the answers
Observe and correct
*Answer key:
a) Nien lives in Hue.
b) No, she doesn't.
c) She wasn't old enough to be in my class.
d) Nien is going to visit Hoa at Christmas

Remark and correct


* Feed-back(1)
Listen and answer
What is the main content of the lesson?
3.Homework(3)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make 3 examples using enough
- Do the exercises 1, 2 in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen

Date of preparing : 10/08/2012

Date of teaching:

UNIT 1 : MY FRIENDS

Period 3

Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen


I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Make sentences to describe the people in the pictures
- Listen to dialogues about introducing oneself and getting acquainted and
fill the information in the blanks
- Standard : Make sentences to describe the people in the pictures
Listen to the conversations and fill the information in the blanks
- Higher : Free practice describing the people in the class
+ Vocabulary: slim(adj); curly(adj) ; bald(adj); blond(adj) = fair(adj); dark(adj)=
black(adj)
+ Structures : - Its a pleasure to meet you.( listening)
- Id like you to meet( listening)
2. Skills :
+ Speaking : Make questions and answers about describing people
+ Listening : Listen to the conversation and fill the information in the blanks
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities
6

*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Brainstorming"
Divide the students into two teams and
ask them to play

Two groups play on the stage


Think of the adjectives that use to describe
body build and hair:
thin

curly
body build

hair

*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the situation through the
Listen and tell
picture: Hoa is describing someone in the
pictures.Lan is going to guess who it is
Ask ss to retell the structures to describe
people
Present the new words
1. New words
slim(adj)
curly(adj)
bald(adj)
blond(adj) = fair(adj)
dark(adj)= black(adj)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the way to describe the
build and the hair

*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs the model dialogue
in pairs.

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
2. Examples
a. Build:
What does he look like?
He is tall and thin.
V adj
adj
b. Hair
He has short dark hair
V adj adj N
Pairwork

Ask ss to practice describing the people


in the pictures(one describe, the other
guesses)
Ask 6 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct answers

* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the extra board and present the
situation: Now listen to the conversations
and use the expressions in the box to
complete them
Ask ss to discuss about the expressions in
each box
Ask ss to give out their ideas
Explain the use of :
- Its a pleasure to meet you
- Id like you to meet
*While-listening (8)
Play the tape ( 3 times)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct answers

* Post-listening (2)
Ask 3 ss to practice greeting and
introducing and getting acquainted

Pairwork

Observe and remark


* Answers:
Ex 1:
S1: This person is short and fat. His hair
is short and black.
S2: Is this Mr.Lai ?
Ex 2:
A: What does Van look like ?
B: He is tall and thin. He has short black
hair....
Observe and listen carefully

Pairwork
3. Listen
- Its a pleasure to meet you = Nice to meet
you
- Id like you to meet my brother
Listen carefully and check
Correct by themselves
Observe and listen carefully
* Key:
1) Id like you to meet
2) Nice to meet you
3) Id like you to meet
4) Its a pleasure to meet you
5) Come and meet
6) How do you do
Work in groups of 3
* Suggestions :
- Hello,
8

- Hi,
- Id like
- Its a pleasure
- Nice , too
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3.Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make 3 dialogues to describe 3 people
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
.
.
.
.

WEEK 2
Date of preparing : 15/08/2012

Date of teaching:

UNIT 1 : MY FRIENDS

Period 4

Lesson 3 : Read
I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read a passage describing the
characters of 3 of Bas close friends and do the exercises
- Standard: Read and choose the best answers(exercise 1) and answer the questions
(exercise 2)
- Higher : Write some sentences to describe one of the three friends
+ Vocabulary: character (n);orphanage (n); sense of humor ; joke (n); annoy (v);
sociable (adj); generous (adj); outgoing (adj) = easy going (adj); kind (adj); reserved
(adj); hard-working (adj)
+ Structures : - Present simple
- be(not) + adj + enough + to- infinitive
2. Skills :
+ Reading- comprehension: Read and choose the best answers(exercise 1) and answer
the questions (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love their friends, and conserve their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary of builds and characters
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(3)
Ask 2 ss to make a dialogue to describe their friends
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Hangman

Students activities
The whole class play together
* Hangman : This is an adjective.If it is a
verb, it is opposite to open

_____
10

Key : close
What does it mean?
Present the new lesson
*Pre- reading(10)
Introduce the situation through the picture: Listen and answer
This is Ba and these are his friends
How many close friends does he have?
Who are they?
Present the new words
1. New words
character (n)
orphanage (n)
sense of humor
joke (n)
annoy (v)
sociable (adj)
generous (adj)
outgoing (adj) = easy going (adj)
kind (adj)
reserved (adj)
hard-working (adj)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Listen and correct by themselves
*While-reading (20)
Ask ss to read the text silently
Read the text silently
Ask ss to choose the best answer (exercise Complete the sentences
1)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Observe and correct
Ask others to remark and correct
Correct by themselves
Remark and give out the answer key
* Key:
1. A
2. C
3. B
4. D
Ask ss to read the text again and answer
Read the text again and work in pairs to ask
the questions
and answer the questions
Ask some pairs to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Observe and correct
Remark and give out the answer key
Correct by themselves
*Answer:
a) He feels lucky to have a lot of friends.
11

b) Bao is the most sociable.


c) Khai likes reading.
d) A bad thing about Ba' s jokes is that
sometimes his jokes annoy his friends.
e) He spends his free time doing volunteer
work at a local orphanage.
^
* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to write some sentences to describe
a close friend
* Writing
Ask ss to read their sentences
His name is He is(adj) .He has ..He
Remark and correct
is (adj)
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
Listen and answer
3.Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Do exercise 3 in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Write
Date of preparing: 15/8/2012

Period 5

Date of teaching:

UNIT 1 : MY FRIENDS
Lesson 4 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a passage about the
personal information of the friend from words cues
- Standard: write a passage about the personal information of the friend from words
cues
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the friend
+ Vocabulary: humorous (adj); helpful(adj)
+ Structures : Present simple
What does he look like?
What is he like?
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the friend
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love their friends, and conserve their friendship
12

II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(3)
Ask 2 ss some questions
What does your mother look like?
What does your father look like?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


* Networks :
sociabl
e
character

body build
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
*Pre- writing(10)
Introduce the content of the writing
through the extra board about Tam
Ask ss to answer some questions about
Tam
What is his name?
How old is he?
Where does he live?
Who does he live with?
What does he look like?
What is he like?
Who are his friends?
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the difference between

tall

Observe and listen


Listen and answer

1. New words
humorous (adj)
helpful(adj)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen and remember
13

What does he look like? and


What is he like?

- What does he look like?


- He is tall
- What is he like?
- He is generous

*While-writing(20)
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ssk
Write the letter individually
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
Observe and correct
writings on the board
Remark and give out the suggested writing Correct by themselves
* Suggested writing:
Her name' s Vu Thi Thu Hang and she is 13
years old. She lives at 14 Bach Hac street in
Viet Tri with her father, mother and her
older brother. She is tall and fat and has
short black hair. She is outgoing and
helpful. She has 2 best friends Nga and
Hung
* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss to ask and answer some questions
Pairwork
about the friend
Eg: What is his/her name?
How old is he/she?
Where does he/she live?
Who does he/she live with?
What does he/she look like?
What is he/she like?
Who are his/her friends?
Ask 1 pair to practice
Remark and correct
Listen and correct
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
Listen and answer
3.Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write another passage
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus : Review simple tenses and be(not)
+adj+

Date of preparing : 15/8/2012

Date of teaching:
14

UNIT 1 : MY FRIENDS

Period 6

Lesson 5 : Language focus


I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- The present and past simple tense (irregular verbs)
- The present simple to talk about general truths
- be (not) + adj + enough + to infinitive
- Standard: Complete the paragraphs using the past simple or present simple
Complete the dialogues using the verbs in the box and (not) + adj +
enough
- Higher : Ask and answer the questions using the past simple tense
+ Vocabulary: review the vocabulary of builds and characters
+ Structures: Present simple and past simple, (not) + adj + enough
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(2)
Ask 2 ss some questions
What did you do last night?
What did you do last week?
What do you do everyday?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Pelmanism

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Pelmanism:
1
2
3

live

show

send

come

sent

came

lived

showed

*Key :
15

1- 7 ; 2- 8 ; 3- 5 ; 4- 6
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
*Simple tenses (7)- Exercise 1
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra boards
Ask ss to retell the structures of the past
simple and present simple
Notice ss about the irregular verbs
Ask the ss to look at the extra board and
the examples
Ask ss to work in pairs to complete
passages
Ask some pairs to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Observe and listen

Listen and tell

Pairwork
Listen and correct
Correct by themselves
1.Exercise 1
a) 1- lives ; 2- sent ; 3- was ; 4- is
b) 1- are; 2- came; 3- showed; 4introduced

*The present simple (10)( Exercise 3)


Hang the picture ( Exercise 2) and present
the situation : Ba is helping his cousin with
some homework, now use simple present
to complete the dialogue (general truths)
Ask ss to work in pairs to
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Observe and listen

Pairwork
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2.Exercise 2
Answers:
(1)- sets
(4)- is

*Not + adj + enough (10)( Exercise 4)


Ask ss to look at the model sentences on
the board and ask ss to retell the form of
Not + adj + enough
Ask ss to write the sentences on the
drafting paper
Ask ss to practice

(2)- goes
(5)- is

(3)- moves
(6)- is

Listen and answer


Individual work
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
16

Remark and correct

*Describe people (8)( Exercise 3)

- Ask ss to look at the picture and ask

3. Exercise 4
* Key:
a) not big enough
b) not old enough
c) strong enough
d) good enough
Listen and answer

a) How many people are there in the


picture ?
b) What does each person look like ?
c) What is each person wearing ?
Answers:
a) There are 4 people in the picture.
b) There is a thin, tall woman; there is a
tall, heavy man; there is a boy sitting on the
ground , ...
c) The man is wearing a yellow shirt and
black trousers. The woman is wearing a
green skirt and red blouse, she is carrying a
shoulder bag. The boy is wearing a blue
shorts and a white shirt .
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(3)
- Do these exercies again in the book, and do exercise 4, 5, 6, 7 in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson : Unit 2 : Getting started + Listen and read

.
.
.

WEEK 3
17

Date of preparing : 24/08/2012

Period 7

UNIT 2 : MAKING ARRANGEMENTS


Lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Talk about intentions
- Make arrangements on the phone
- Take a message by talking to someone on the phone
- Listen to dialogue for specific information
- Read passages for general or detailed information
- Write a telephone message
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue
between Hoa and Nga on the phone for general or detailed information
- Standard: Read and understand the dialogue to know about how to make an
arrangement on the phone
- Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue
+ Vocabulary: downstairs(adv) ; afraid(adj), outside (adv); arrange(v) ; agree(v);
fine(adj); use(v) ; of course.
+ Structures : - Can/ Could I speak/talk to , please?
- Hold on
- Is 6.30 all right?
- Lets meet outside the theater.
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be polite on the phone
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5) Matching game :
Ask ss to play the game Matching game
Use the pictures and the words in the box

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


18

* Answers:
a
b
c
d
e
f
Remark the game
Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene: you are
going to listen to Hoa and Ngas talk on
the phone.
Ask ss to discuss the questions
- What are they going to do?
- Where are they going to meet?
- What time are they going to meet?
Give ss the new words

a fax machine
an answer machine
a mobile phone
an address book
a public telephone
a telephone dire...

Observe and listen carefully


Observe and listen
Discuss in pairs

1. New words
downstairs(adv)
afraid(adj),
outside (adv)
arrange(v) arrangement(n)
agree(v)
fine(adj)
use(v)
of course
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present some new structures in the
dialogue

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
- Can/ Could I speak/talk to , please?
- Hold on
- Is 6.30 all right?
- Lets meet outside the theater.
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
19

Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to answer the
questions using the information from the
dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Observe and rermark

3. Answer the questions


* Answers:
a) Nga made the call.
b) Nga introduced herself.
c) Nga invited Hoa to the movies.
d) Nga arranged a meeting place.
e) Hoa arranged the time.
f) Nga agreed with the time.
Listen and answer

*Production( 5)
Ask ss some questions
1.What is the name of the movie?
2.Where is it on?
3.What time does it start?
4.How will Hoa go there?
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Learn the dialogue by heart
- Do exercises in the work book part 1,2,3 ( page 12-14)
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen

Date of preparing: 24 /8/2012


20

Period 8

UNIT 2 : MAKING ARRANGEMENTS


Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Make an arrangement on the phone
- Listen to a telephone dialogue and fill in the missing information
- Standard : Make an arrangement on the phone about Ba and Bao
Listen to a telephone dialogue and fill in the missing information
- Higher : Make an arrangement on the phone about themselves
+ Vocabulary: concert(n); band(n) ; inside(adv); corner(n); front(adj); principal(n);
available(adj).
+ Structures : - Can/ Could I speak/talk to , please?
- Is 6.30 all right?
- Lets meet outside the theater. (review)
- Leave a message
- Make an appointment
- to be out
2. Skills :
+ Speaking : Make questions and answers to make an arrangement
+ Listening : Listen to the conversation and fill the missing information in the table
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(3)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Divide the class into three teams and ask
them to play on the stage

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks
see a movie
M

listen to
Pastim
es
21

play games
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
*Pre- speaking(10)
Present the new words
1. New words
concert(n)
band(n)
inside(adv)
corner(n)
front(adj)
principal(n)
available(adj)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to retell the structures to make an
arrangement

Hang the extra board and ask ss about the


questions in part (1)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and give out the correct answers

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
2. Structures
- Can/ Could I speak/talk to , please?
- Is 6.30 all right?
- Lets meet outside the theater. (review)
Pairwork
Observe and listen carefully
1-b
5-i
9-g

2-f
6-c
10 - h

3-j
7-e
11 - d

4-a
8-k

*While-speaking(17)
Now you use the information in the
Pairwork
dialogue and complete the dialogue
between Ba and Bao in part (2)
Go around the classroom to help ss practice
Ask students to practice in pairs before the
Listen carefully and check
class
Correct by themselves
Remark and correct the mispronunciation
Observe and listen carefully
22

* Answers:
Bao: May I speak to Ba, please ?
Bao: I am fine, thanks. And you ?
Bao: Can you play chess tonight ?
Bao: What about tomorrow afternoon ?
Bao: I'll meet you at Central Chess Club
Bao: Is 2.00 o'clock OK ?
* Pre- listening (5)
Hang the extra board on and present the
situation: You will hear a telephone
conversation between a woman and the
secretary of Kingston Junior high school.
Listen and complete the message
* While- listening (7)
Play the tape (3times)
Ask ss to give out their answers on the
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen carefully

Listen carefully and check the pictures


Share and compare with a partner
Observe and correct
* Key:
Kingston Junior High School
Date: .................. Time: ..............
For: ....... The Principal ........
Message: Mrs.Mary Nguyen wanted to see
you at 9.45 in the morning on Tuesday.
Telephone number: 64683720942

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3.Homework(1)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make a dialogue about part (b). Write a dialogue about a telephone appointment
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Read

Date of preparing: 04/9/2011

23

Period 9

UNIT 2 : MAKING ARRANGEMENTS


Lesson 3 : Read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand a passage
about the invention of the telephone
- Standard: Read and check the boxes (exercise 1) and answer the questions (exercise
2)
- Higher : Answer some questions about Bell
+ Vocabulary: emigrate (v); experiment (v; n); transmit (v) ; conduct (v); demonstrate
(v); deaf- mute (n); assistant (n); device (n) ; exhibition (n); countless (adj)
+ Structures: Past simple
2. Skills :
+ Reading- comprehension: Read and check the boxes (exercise 1) and answer the
questions (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love their friends, and conserve their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review past simple and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss to make a dialogue to make a phone appointment
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5): Game: Matching
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Matching :
be
say
introduce
go
work

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
Hang the picture on and ask ss :
1.Do you know this person?
2.What is he doing?
3.Where is he from?
4.When did he invent the telephone ?

said
was/were
worked
introduced
went

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)

24

Present some new words

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the verbs in the past in
the text
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently and check
the sentences and correct them
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

1. New words
emigrate (v)
experiment (v; n)
transmit (v)
conduct (v)
demonstrate (v)
deaf- mute (n)
assistant (n)
device (n)
exhibition (n)
countless (adj)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen and remember again
Read the text silently
Use the information in the text to check
Observe and correct
Correct
Correct by themselves
2. Check the boxes
a) F. He was born in Edinburgh, Scotland.
b) F. He workedwith deaf-mutes at Boston
University.

c) T
d) F. Bell and Watson introduced the telephone
in 1876 (not 1877)
e) F. Bell experimented with ways of
transmitting speech over a long distance.

f) T
Pairwork
Ask ss to work in pairs to put the events
in the correct order
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Observe and correct


Correct by themselves
3. Put the events in the correct order
Alexander Graham Bell ...
1) was born in Scotland.
25

2) went to live in Canada.


3) went to live in the United States.
4) worked with people neither speak nor
hear.
5) worked with Thomas Watson.
6) successfully demonstrated his inventions.
7) invented the telephone.
* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss some questions about Bell
1. Where was he born?
2. Who did he work with at Boston
University?
3. When did he first introduce the
telephone?
4. Was the telephone in commercial use
in 1876?
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write about 10 sentences about Bell
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next period : Part write

Date of preparing: 07/9/2011

26

Period 10

UNIT 2 : MAKING ARRANGEMENTS


Lesson 4 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a telephone message using
the passage or the dialogue cues
- Standard: write a telephone message using the passage or the dialogue cues
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about message
+ Vocabulary: customer (n); furniture(n); delivery(n); service(n); stationery order; ;
reach(v); racket(n); pick up(v).
+ Structures : Structure of a telephone message
She was out at the moment
Take a message/ Leave a message
Call at 0 123 565 778
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using paragraph or dialogue cues
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the friend
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love their friends, and conserve their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss to talk on the phone to invite to the circus
2. The new lesson

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Hangman
On your mobile phone, you usually send a
.to your friends

Students activities

The whole class play together


* Hangman:
_______

* Key : message

27

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a telephone
message
*Pre- writing(10)
Ask ss to tell the structurre of a telephone
message
Ask ss to show their ideas
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the telephone passage in
part 1and complete the passage with the
information from the telephone passage
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Observe and listen


Listen and tell

1. New words
customer (n)
furniture(n)
delivery(n)
service(n)
stationery order
reach(v)
racket(n)
pick up(v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Show out the answers
Listen and copy
*Answers:

(1) telephoned
(3) speak
(5) name
(7) Mr.Ha
Ask ss to read the passage and write a
telephone message for Thanh Cong
delivery service
*While-writing(17)
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two

(2) May 12
(4) took
(6) delivery
(8) at

Read and write it individually


Observe and correct
28

writings on the board


Remark and give out the answers

Correct by themselves
* Suggested writing:
Thanh Cong Delivery service
Date: June 16
Time: 10.am
For: Mrs.Van
Message: Mr.Nam called about his
stationery order. He wants you to
call him at 8 634 082
Taken by: Mr.Toan

* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss to read the dialogue in part 3 and
write another telephone message for Lisa
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

Individual work

Observe and correct


Correct by themselves
* Suggested writing:
Date: May 19
Time: 10.am
For: Nancy
Message: Tom called about playing
tennis this afternoon. He will come over
to pick you up at 1.30
Taken by: Lisa

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write another telephone message
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
Date of preparing: 08/9/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 16/9/2011
8B : 13/9/2011
29

8C : 10/9/2011
Period 11

UNIT 2 : MAKING ARRANGEMENTS


Lesson 5 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Be going to to talk about intentions
- Adverbs place
- Standard: Write the intention sentences using the situations given
Complete the questionaire using be going to in interrogative sentence
Complete the speech bubbles using the adverbs of place
- Higher : Ask and answer the questions about themselves
+ Vocabulary: novel(n); fishing rod (n); action movie
+ Structures: be going to and adverbs of place
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(2)
Ask 2 ss some questions
What are you going to do this evening?
What are you going to do tomorrow?
2. The new lesson

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Networks:
tomorrow

next week

30

tonight
Remark the game and present the new
lesson

Observe and listen

* Be going to(15)- Exercise 1+2


Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the structures be going to Listen and tell
in affirative, negative and interrogative
forms
*Key :
+
S+ am/is/are + Ving + ...
S+ am/is/are + not + Ving + ...
?
Is/Are + S+ Ving + ...?
Ask ss to look at the model sentence and
explain the aim
Ask ss to use the situations in part 1 to
make intention sentences
Ask some pairs to practice their sentences
Remark and correct

Observe and listen


Pairwork
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
a) They are going to go fishing
b) Trang is going to read th novel
c) Van is going to do her Math homework
d) Mr.Hoang is going to watch an action
movie on TV this evening
e) Hien is going to go to her friends
birthday party
Pairwork

Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer


about the things they are going to do on the
weekend using the interrogative form
Ask some pairs to practice
Observe and correct
Remark and correct
*Adverbs of place (15) -( Exercise 3)
Ask ss to look at the pictures and ask:
Observe and answer
What are they doing?
Who is the hider/ seeker?
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
Observe and listen
guide ss to do the exercise

31

Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to


Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Write the sentences on drafting paper


Remark and correct
2. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
a: upstairs
b: here
c: downstairs
d: outside
e: there
f: inside

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar from unit 1 to unit 2 to prepare for the 15 minutetest.
- Prerpare for Unit 3: Getting started + Listen and read
Date of preparing: 11/9/2011

Period 12

Date of teaching:
8A : 17/9/2011
8B : 14/9/2011
8C : 13/9/2011

UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Describe positions of things
- Advise someone to do something
- Talk about the reasons and results of the events
- Listen to a dialogue to check the right items about how to cook a meal
- Read passages to know the safety precautions for childrren when using
the things in the home
- Write a passage to describe a room in the house
b. The aims of the lesson
32

+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue
between Nam and Mrs.Vui on the phone for general or detailed information
- Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to write the things Nam has to do
- Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue
+ Vocabulary: cupboard(n) ; steamer(n); sink (n); saucepan(n) ; stove(n); frying
pan(n); use(v) ; ought to (v), have to (v)
+ Structures : - Prepositions of place: in, under, between, beside
- Reflexive pronouns: yourself, myself
- Modals: ought to, have to
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be polite on the phone
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5) Matching game :
Ask ss to play the game Matching game
Use the pictures and the words on the
board

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


* Answers:
a
b
c
d
e
f

washing the dishes


making the bed
cleaning the floor
cooking meals
tidying up
feeding the chickens

Observe and listen carefully


Remark the game
Give the correct answers.
Observe and listen
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene: you are
going to listen to Mrs.Vui and Nam, her
son on the phone.Tonight Mrs.Vui is going
to be home late because she will have to
1. New words
go and visit her mother, Nams grandma.
cupboard(n)
She asked Nam to do some things for her
steamer(n)
33

Give ss the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present some new structures in the
dialogue

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Ask ss to guess what Nam will have to do?
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to write the things
Nam has to do using the information from
the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

sink (n)
saucepan(n)
stove(n)
frying pan(n)
use(v)
ought to (v)
have to (v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
- Prepositions of place: in, under, between,
beside
- Reflexive pronouns: yourself, myself
- Modals: ought to, have to
Eg: Youll have to cook dinner yourself
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
Discuss in pairs

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Observe and rermark

3. Answer the questions


* Answers:
Nam has to cook dinner.
He has to go to the market and buy fish and
vegetables.
He has to call his Aunt Chi and ask her to
34

meet his mother at Grandma's house.


Listen and answer
*Production( 5)
Ask ss some questions
1.What time will Nams mother be home?
2.What will Nam have to do?
3.Where is the rice/ steamer/ rice cooker?
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write a schedule about your everyday work
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak
Date of preparing: 14/9/2011

Period 13

Date of teaching:
8A : 20/9/2011
8B : 16/9/2011
8C : 16/9/2011

UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 2 : Speak

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to describe positions of things in
the kitchen
- Standard: describe positions of things in the kitchen
- Higher: describe positions of things in the kitchen and other places in their house
+ Vocabulary: bowl(n); plate(n) ; rug(n); cushion(n).
+ Structures : - The + N + be + prepositions of position + the + N
S
- Lets put + prepositions of position + the + N
2. Skills: Speaking skills: Make describing sentences
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be tidy
35

II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Divide the class into 2 teams and ask them
to play on the stage

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
* Networks
rice cooker
Things
in
kitchen

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- speaking(10)
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Present the structures to describe the
position of the things in a room

Hang the pictures and ask ss to practice in


exchange pairs to describe the position of
the things in a room

TV

Things in
dining
room

1. New words
bowl(n)
plate(n)
rug(n)
cushion(n).
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
2. Structures
- The + N + be + prepositions of position + the + N
S
- Lets put + prepositions of position + the + N

Eg:
- The fruit is in the bowl
- The plate is on the table
Pairwork

36

*While-speaking(17)
Go around the classroom to help ss practice Listen carefully and check
Ask students to practice in pairs before the Correct by themselves
class
Observe and listen carefully
Remark and correct the mispronunciation
* Answers:
Eg:
- The calendar is on the wall, above the
stove.
- The knives are on the wall, under the
cupboard.
* Post- speaking (10)
Now ask ss to look at the picture in part 2
and guide ss through the examples

Observe and listen carefully


Eg:
S1: Let's put the armchair opposite the
couch.
S2: OK. And I think we ought to put the rug
between the armchair and the couch.

Ask ss to pairwork
Ask some pairs to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen carefully and check


Remark and correct
Observe and correct
Listen and answer

3.Homework(1)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write a paragraph about part (1).
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Listen
Date of preparing: 15/9/2011

Period 14

Date of teaching:
8A : 23/9/2011
8B : 20/9/2011
8C : 17/9/2011

UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 3 : Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


37

1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to a dialogue about how
to cook a meal and check the right items
- Standard: Listen to a dialogue about how to cook a meal and check the right items
- Higher: Write a passage to guide how to cook Chinese fried rice
+ Vocabulary: fried rice(n); garlic(n) ; teaspoon(n); until(prep); ham(n).
+ Structures: Use the big pan / Wait until its hot
2. Skills:
+ Listening: Listen to the conversation and choose the correct items
+ Writing: Write an instruction of cooking a meal
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay healthy, eat sensibly and be tidy
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask: What do you have for breakfast/ lunch /dinner?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Guessing game

Students activities
The whole class play together
* Guessing game
O-B--R--* Key
Oil
Bean
Rice

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- listening(10)
Present the new words

1. New words
fried rice(n)
garlic(n)
teaspoon(n)
until(prep)
ham(n)

38

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Listen and correct by themselves
Ask ss to retell the structures of commands Observe listen and answer
2. Structures: commands
- Use the big pan
- Wait until its hot
Hang the pisture and present the situation: Observe and listen
Lan is helping her mom Mrs. Tu cook The
Special Chinese fried rice
Ask ss to work in pairs to write the
Pairwork
ingridients and the steps to cook the fried
rice
Ask ss to give out their ideas
Listen carefully and check
* While- listening (10)
Play the tape (3times)
Ask ss to give out their answers on the
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Post- listening (10)


Ask ss to write the instruction to cook the
Chinese fried rice
Ask ss to read their writing
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (3)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen carefully and check


Correct by themselves
Observe and listen carefully
* Answers:
a) fried rice
b) pan
c) garlic and green peppers
d) ham and peas.
Write on the paper
Listen carefully and check
Correct by themselves
* Suggested ideas:
- Heat the pan
- Put some oil in the pan
- Fry the garlic and the green pepers
- Put the ham in the pan
- Put the rice and a teaspoon of salt in and
cook for a moment
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
39

- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart


- Write the instruction in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Read
Date of preparing: 18/9/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 23/9/2011
8B : 21/9/2011
8C : 20/9/2011

UNIT 3 : AT HOME

Period 15

Lesson 4 : Read
I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand a passage
about the safety precautions in the home
- Standard: Read and tick the boxes, then correct the false ones (exercise 1) and answer
the questions (exercise 2)
- Higher : Write a list of the things that children should or shount do to be safe at
home
+ Vocabulary: safety (n); precaution (n); chemicals (n) ; lock (v); soft (a); dangerous
(a); match (n); destroy (v) ; injure (v); cause a fire(v); cover(v); elctrical socket;
kill(v); object(n).
+ Structures: Past simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and check the boxes (exercise 1) and answer
the questions (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay safe and know the ways to look after the
children and play safely in the home
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review modal verbs and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss to give the instructions of cooking fried rice
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5): Game: Networks
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks : Dangers in the home
fire
hot water

40

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
What do you do to prevent children from
dangers in the home?
Present some new words

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the modal verbs in the text
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently and check
the sentences and correct them
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)


1. New words
safety (n)
precaution (n)
chemicals (n)
lock (v)
soft (a)
dangerous (a)
match (n)
destroy (v)
injure (v)
cause a fire(v)
cover(v)
elctrical socket
kill(v)
object(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen and remember again
Read the text silently
Use the information in the text to check
Observe and correct
Correct
Correct by themselves
2. Check the boxes
Answers:
a) False. It is safe to keep medicine in locked
cupboards.
b) True
c) False. A kitchen is dangerous place to play.
d) False. Playing with one mtach can cause a
41

fire.
e) True.
f) True.
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer Pairwork
the questions, notice ss about the
questions with why and because
Ask ss to give out their answers
Observe and correct
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key
Correct by themselves

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss some write a list of the things we
should or should nt do to be safe
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

3. Answer
a) Because children often try to eat and drink
them.
b) Because the kichen is a dangerous place.
c) Because playing with matches can cause a
fire.
d) Because children often try to put ST into
electrical sockets, electricity can kill
e) Because the dangerous objects can injure or
kill childrern.
Listen and write

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write about 10 sentences about the things we should or should nt do to be safe
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next period : Part write
Date of preparing: 21/9/2011

Period 16

Date of teaching:
8A : 24/9/2011
8B : 23/9/2011
8C : 23/9/2011

UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 5 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


42

1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a description of a room
using word cues and the picture
- Standard: write a a description of a room using word cues and the picture
cues
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the position of the things in the picture
+ Vocabulary: corner (n); oven(n); towel rack(n); counter(n); beneath(prep); ; jar(n);
flour(n); lighting fixture(n); above(prep); vase(n); wardrobe(n)
+ Structures: Structure of describing the position
On the other side
In the right corner
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and picture cues
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the objects
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be tidy
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 28 and ask: Where is/are the.?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

The whole class play together


* Networks:
table
cupboard
Things in
the kitchen

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a description
of a room in the house
*Pre- writing(10)
Ask ss to tell the prepositions of position
Give ss some necessary words

Observe and listen


Listen and tell
1. New words
43

corner (n)
oven(n)
towel rack(n)
counter(n)
beneath(prep)
jar(n)
flour(n
lighting fixture(n)
above(prep)
vase(n)
wardrobe(n)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves

Ask ss to read the passage about Hoas


Read silently
beroom
Ask ss some questions
Show out the answers
Where is the desk?
Where are the folders?
Where is the bookshelf?
Where is the bed?
Where is the window?
Where is the wardrobe?
Remark and correct
Ask ss to write a passage to describe Hoas
kitchen
*While-writing(17)
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers
Listen and copy
*Answers:
This is Hoas kitchen
There is a refrigerator in the right corner of
the room. Next to the refrigerator is the
stove and oven. On the other side of the
oven, there is a sink and next to the sink is a
towel rack
The dish rack is on the counter to the right
44

* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss about the position of the objects in
Hoas kitchen
Remark and give out the answers
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

of the windowand beneath the shelves. On


the counter beneath the window, there are
some jars of sugar, flour and tea. In the
middle of the kitchen, there is a table and
four chairs. The lighting fixture is above the
table and beneath the lighting fixture is a
vase of flowers
Listen and answer
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves

Listen and answer


3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write another passage to describe one of your rooms
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
Date of preparing: 22/9/2011

Period 17

Date of teaching:
8A : 27/9/2011
8B : 27/9/2011
8C : 24/9/2011

UNIT 3 : AT HOME
Lesson 6 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Reflexive pronouns
- Modals: must, have to, ought to
- Why? Because
- Standard: Complete the dialogue using must or have to
Give advice using ought to
Complete the dialogues using the reflexive pronouns
Ask and answer the questions using Why and Because
- Higher : Ask and answer some morre questions
+ Vocabulary: fail(v); repairman (n); draw(v); tank(n)
45

+ Structures: Reflexive pronouns, modals


Why? Because
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Networks:
tidy the room

Chores
wash clothes
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
* Modals(12)- Exercise 1+2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the use of must, have to ,
and ought to

Observe and listen

Listen and tell


*Key :
S+ must/ ought to+ Vinfi + ...
S+ have / has to + Vinfi + ...

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


explain the aim
Ask ss to use the pictures in part 1 to
complete the sentences

Observe and listen


Pairwork
46

Ask some pairs to practice their sentences


Remark and correct

Ask ss to work in pairs to give advice to


the people using the pictures and the
sentences
Ask some pairs to practice
Remark and correct

*Reflexive pronouns (10) -( Exercise 3)


Ask ss to look at the dialogues and present
the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Listen and correct


Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) must tidy
2) must dust
3) have to sweep
4) have to clean
5) must empty
6) must feed
Pairwork
Remark and correct
2. Exercise 2.
* Keys:
a: you ought to study harder
b: you ought to get up earlier
c: you ought to eat less/more fruit and
vegetables
d: you ought to go to the dentists
Observe and listen
Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
3. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
1) ourselves
2) myself
3) yourself
4) himself
5) herself
6) themselves
7) yourselves

47

*Why?/ Because (15) -( Exercise 4)


Ask ss to look at the pictures and present
the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Observe and listen


Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
4. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
b) Why did Nam have to cook dinner?
Because his Mom was home late
c) Why was Nams Mom home late?
Because she had to go and visit his
grandmother
d) Why did Ha fail her English exam?
Because played computer games
4) Why didnt Nga go the movies?
Because had to clean the kitchen and
sweep the living room
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar from unit 1 to unit 3 to prepare for revision.
- Prerpare for the next period: Revision
Date of preparing: 25/9/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 30/9/2011
8B : 28/9/2011
8C : 27/9/2011

Period 18
REVISION
I. The aims of the lesson
1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary from Unit to Unit 3
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme personal information
+ Structures :
- adj + enough + to(infinitive)
48

- Be going to
- Adverbs of place
- Modals
- Reflexive pronouns
- Why? Because
2. Skills: 4 skills
3 . Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be tidy
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, exercises
2. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary from unit 1-3
III. The stages of the lesson
1.The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

* Warm-up (2)
Listen and answer
Say hello to the students
How are you?
Today were going to review the main
grammar points and vocabulary from unit
1 to unit 3
* Review(30)
Ask ss to retell some forms and uses of
- Listen and retell
adj + enough + to(infinitive)
1.be(not) + adj + enough+ to(V)
have/has + enough+ N + to (V)
dont/ doesnt have+ enough+ N + to (V)
Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss
discuss to make examples
Remark and correct
Ask the class to retell the use, forms of
be going to and make 3 examples on the
board
Remark and correct

Three groups make and show out their


sentences
2. be going to + V)

S + be going to V +
S + be + not going to V +
Be + S + going to V +?
Eg:
She is going to play chess tonight
She isnt going to play chess tonight
49

Is she going to play chess tonight?


3. Adverbs of place
Ask the class to retell the adverbs of place
here, there, inside, outside, upstairs,
Remark and correct
downstairs
Eg: I am inside
Ask the class to retell the use of reflexive 4. Reflexive pronouns
pronouns
I
myself
Remark and correct
you
yourself
he
himself
she
herself
it
itself
we
ourselves
you
yourselves
they
themselves
Ask the class to retell the use of each
modal verb
Remark and correct

Ask the class to retell the use of Whyquestions and how to answer them
Remark and correct

5. Modals: must, have to and ought to


S + Modals + V(infi)
Eg: He must go now
She ought to come soon
Listen and answer
6. Why?...Because.
Eg: - Why did he come to school late?
- Because he got up late
- Because he missed the bus

* Feed-back(3)
Listen and answer
Ask ss to tell the main grammar points
that thay have to review

3. Homework (2)
Review from unit 1 to unit 3 to prepare for the next lesson: Test 45 minutes
Date of preparing: 28/9/2011

Date of teaching:
50

8A : 01/10/2011
8B : 30/9/2011
8C : 30/9/2011

TEST

Period 19

Time: 45 minutes
I.The aims of the lesson
1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, the teacher will check ss vocabulary, grammar
and knowledges from unit 1 to unit 3
+ Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 1 to unit 3
+ Structures:
- adj + enough + to(infinitive)
- Be going to
- Adverbs of place
- Modals
- Reflexive pronouns
- Why? Because
2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
II. Matrix
1. For class 8B and 8C
Tn
Ch

Listening

Nhn bit
TNKQ

Thng hiu
TL

TNKQ

TL

My friends
(Tick True/ False )
5 cu x 0.3 = 1,5

TN
KQ

TL

Cng
5 cu
1,5 =
15%

At home
(Tick True/
False )
5 cu x
0,5=2,5

Reading

Vocabulary

Vn dng

My friends,
Making
arrangements
, At home
(Multiple
choice)
4 cu x 0,5 =
2,0

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

4 cu
2= 20%

51

Grammar

My friends, Making
arrangements, At
home

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

(Multiple choice)
5 cu x 0.5 = 2,5

Writing

S cu
S im

10 cu
4,0 im= 40%

4 cu
2,0 im=20%

5 cu
2,5 im=
25%

My friends
(Rearrange
the words )
5 cu x 0,3
= 1,5
5 cu
1,5 im=
15%

5 cu
1,5 =
15%
24 cu
100%

I. Preparations
1.Teacher : photo the tests : 68 sheets
2. Students: review from unit 1 to unit 3, drafting paper.
* Questions
I. Listen to the passage and check the True or False statements ( 1,5 points)
T

1. He is fourteen years old


2. Nam is tall and thin
3. He has short fair hair
4. He is generous and sociable
5. He has three best friends
II. Read the passage and check the True or False sentences (2,5 points)
This is my bedroom. There is a table on the left of the room. On the table there are
some books and some pens, and above the table there is a bookshelf. In the middle of the
room, there is a bed. On the right of the room there is a window. Next to the window there
is a wardrobe.
True or False?:
T
F
1. The table on the left of the room
2. The bookshelf is beneath the table
3. The bed is in the middle of the room
4. The window is in the middle of the room
52

5. The wardrobe is opposite the window


III. Choose the most suitable word to complete the sentences (2points)
1. Can I ..to Na, please?
a. speak
b. say
c. see
d. meet
2. You wash vegetables, dishes, cookers in the.
a. cooker
b. sink
c. cupboard
d. frying pan
3. She doesnt talk much in public. She is
a. sociable
b. easy-going
c. reserved
d. hard-working
4. Washing clothes, cooking, sweeping the yard are called .......
a. chores
b. homework
c. home
d.house
IV. Choose the most suitable answer to complete the sentences (2,5points)
1.The Eartharound the sun
a. go
b. will go
c. goes
d. to go
2. He is ...to lift the box
a. strong enough
b. enough strong
c. strong
d. enough
3. He .in Ho Chi Minh city last year
a. live
b. lived
c. lives
d. will live
4. They ..go to school on time
a. must
b. ought to
c. have to
d. should
5. I do my homework ..
a. himself
b. yourself
c. herself
d. myself
V. Rearrange the words to make meaningful sentences (1,5 points)
1. Nam/ name/ his/ is .
2. He 13 years old.
3. at/ lives/ 12 Tran Hung Dao/ he/ street.
4. is/ tall and thin/ and/ has/ short black hair/ he
5. is/ and/ humorous/ he/ sociable
* Answer keys:
I. 0,3 x 0,5= 1,5 points.
Tapetranscript:
This is my friend, Nam. He is thirteen years old. He is tall and thin. He has black short
hair. He is generous and sociable. His best friends are Hoa, Long and Minh.
1. T
2. F
3. F
4. T
5. T
II.5x0,5 = 2,5 points
1. T
2. F
3. T
53

4. F
5. F
III. 4x0,5= 2 points
1.a ; 2. b ; 3.c ; 4. a
IV. 5x0,5= 2,5 points
1. c ; 2. a ; 3.b ; 4. c ; 5. d
V. 4x0,5= 2 points
1. His name is Nam.
2. He 13 years old.
3. He lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
4. He is tall and thin and has short black hair.
5. He is sociable and humorous
2. For class 8A

Tn
Ch

Listening

Nhn bit
TNKQ

Thng hiu
TL

TNKQ

TL

My friends
(Tick True/ False )
5 cu x 0.3 = 1,5

TL

Cng
5 cu
1,5 =
15%

At home
(Answer
the
questions )
5 cu x
0,5=2,5

Reading

Vocabulary

Vn dng
TN
KQ

My friends,
Making
arrangements
, At home
(Multiple
choice)
4 cu x 0,5 =
2,0

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

4 cu
2= 20%

54

Grammar

My friends, Making
arrangements, At
home

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

(Multiple choice)
5 cu x 0.5 = 2,5

Writing

S cu
S im

10 cu
4,0 im= 40%

4 cu
2,0 im=20%

5 cu
2,5 im=
25%

My friends
(Write
sentences
using the
information
in the table )
5 cu x 0,3
= 1,5
5 cu
1,5 im=
15%

5 cu
1,5 =
15%

24 cu
100%

I. Preparations
1.Teacher : photo the tests : 34 sheets
2. Students: review from unit 1 to unit 3, drafting paper.
* Questions
I. Listen to the passage and check the True or False statements ( 1,5 points)
T

1. He is fourteen years old


2. Nam is tall and thin
3. He has short fair hair
4. He is generous and sociable
5. He has three best friends
II. Read the passage and answer the questions (2,5 points)
This is my bedroom. There is a table on the left of the room. On the table there are
some books and some pens, and above the table there is a bookshelf. In the middle of the
room, there is a bed. On the right of the room there is a window. Next to the window there
is a wardrobe.
Questions:
1.Is there a table on the left of the room?
2.Where is the bookshelf?
3.Where is the bed?
4.Where is the window?
55

5.Is the wardrobe next to the window?


III. Choose the most suitable word to complete the sentences (2points)
1. Can I ..to Na, please?
a. speak
b. say
c. see
d. meet
2. You wash vegetables, dishes, cookers in the.
a. cooker
b. sink
c. cupboard
d. frying pan
3. She doesnt talk much in public. She is
a. sociable
b. easy-going
c. reserved
d. hard-working
4. Washing clothes, cooking, sweeping the yard are called .......
a. chores
b. homework
c. home
d.house
IV. Choose the most suitable answer to complete the sentences (2,5points)
1.The Eartharound the sun
a. go
b. will go
c. goes
d. to go
2. He is ...to lift the box
a. strong enough
b. enough strong
c. strong
d. enough
3. He .in Ho Chi Minh city last year
a. live
b. lived
c. lives
d. will live
4. They ..go to school on time
a. must
b. ought to
c. have to
d. should
5. I do my homework ..
a. himself
b. yourself

c. herself

d. myself

V. Use the information in the table the words to make meaningful sentences (1,5
points)
Name
Age
Address
Appearance
Characters

Nam
13
12 Tran Hung Dao street
tall, thin, short black hair
sociable and humorous

* Answer keys:
I. 0,3 x 0,5= 1,5 points.
Tapetranscript:
This is my friend, Nam. He is thirteen years old. He is tall and thin. He has black short
hair. He is generous and sociable. His best friends are Hoa, Long and Minh.
1. T
2. F
56

3. F
4. T
5. T
II.5x0,5 = 2,5 points
1. yes, there is
2. The bookshelf is above the table
3. The bed is in the middle of the room
4. The window is on the right of the room
5. Yes, it is
III. 4x0,5= 2 points
1.a ; 2. b ; 3.c ; 4. a
IV. 5x0,5= 2,5 points
2. c ; 2. a ; 3.b ; 4. c ; 5. d
V. 4x0,5= 2 points
His name is Nam. He 13 years old. He lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street. He is tall and
thin and has short black hair. He is sociable and humorous
Date of preparing: 29/9/2011

Period 20

Date of teaching:
8A : 04/10/2011
8B : 04/10/2011
8C : 01/10/2011

CORRECTING THE TEST

I.The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected
and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in
the next lessons
+ Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 1 to unit 3
+ Structures:
- adj + enough + to(infinitive)
- Be going to
- Adverbs of place
- Modals
- Reflexive pronouns
- Why? Because
2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
II.Preparations
1.Teacher give points to the tests
2. Students: review from unit 1 to unit 3.
57

III. The stages of the lesson


1.The old lesson check- up(1)
Check ss preparations
2.The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

* Pre-correcting (10)
Give the tests to ss
Remark the tests generally through the main Get and observe
Observe and listen carefully
mistakes in each part of the test
* While- correcting(30)
Go through each part of the test, ask ss to
point out the correct answer of each
sentence, and explain why

Look at each part of the test, point out the


correct answer of each sentence, and
explain why
I. 0,3 x 0,5= 1,5 points.
Tapetranscript:
This is my friend, Nam. He is thirteen
years old. He is tall and thin. He has black
short hair. He is generous and sociable. His
best friends are Hoa, Long and Minh.
1. T
2. F
3. F
4. T
5. T
II. 5x0,5 = 2,5 points (8B+8C)
1. T
2. F
3. T
4. F
5. F
II. 5x0,5 = 2,5 points (8A)
1. yes, there is
2. The bookshelf is above the table
3. The bed is in the middle of the room
4. The window is on the right of the
room
5. Yes, it is
III. 4x0,5= 2 points
1.a ; 2. b ; 3.c ; 4. a
58

IV. 5x0,5= 2,5 points


3. c ; 2. a ; 3.b ; 4. c ; 5. d
V. 4x0,5= 2 points(8B+8C)
1. His name is Nam.
2. He 13 years old.
3. He lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
4. He is tall and thin and has short black
hair.
5. He is sociable and humorous
V. 4x0,5= 2 points(8A)
His name is Nam. He 13 years old. He
lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street. He is tall
and thin and has short black hair. He is
sociable and humorous
* Post-correcting( 2)
Ask ss to tell what they could and could not
do in the test and know the way to improve Listen and tell out
the knowlege in the next test
* Feed- back(1)
Remind the thing that ss did well and they
did badly in the test.

Listen and remember

3. Homework (1)
- Do the test again in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 4 : Getting started + Listen and read
Date of preparing: 02/10/2011

Period 21

Date of teaching:
8A : 07/10/2011
8B : 05/10/2011
8C : 04/10/2011

UNIT 4 : OUR PAST


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Describe events in the past
- Talk about the events in the past and present events
59

- Listen to a folktale to choose the right moral lesson


- Read the folktale The lost shoe, understand it and answer the questions
- Write a short story using a word cues and model story
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to
know about the things Ngas grandparents did in the past
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and answer the questions, then check the boxes
- Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue
+ Vocabulary: look after(v) ; great grandma(n); meal (n); sound(v) ; electricity(n);
modern(a); equipment(n) ; story(n); folktale (n); traditional (a)
+ Structures : - Past simple tense
- used to
- Prepositions of time: on, in, at
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to look up to their grandparents and parents
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5) Writing game :
Ask ss to play the game Writing
Use the picture on the board

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


* Answers:

60

Remark the game


Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene: you are
going to listen to Nga and her grandmas
coversation, Ngas grandma is telling her
about the things in the past
Give ss the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present some new structures in the
dialogue

Observe and listen carefully


Observe and listen

1. New words
look after(v)
great grandma(n)
meal (n)
sound(v)
electricity(n)
modern(a)
equipment(n)
story(n)
folktale (n)
traditional (a)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
- Past simple tense
- used to
- Prepositions of time: on, in, at
Eg: I used to cook the meals
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Discuss in pairs
Remark and correct the mistake
Ask ss to guess what Ngas grandma had to
do
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the

Listen carefully
Pairwork

61

dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions using the information from
the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Listen
Pairwork

Observe and rermark


3. Answer the questions
* Answers:
a) She used to live on a farm.
b) Because she had to stay home nad help
her Mom
c) She used to cook the meals, clean the
house and wash the clothes
d) She lit the lamp and he told them stories
e) She asked her to tell her the folktale
The lost shoe
Pairwork

Ask ss to work in pairs to check the


sentences
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Listen
4. Facts or opinions
* Answers:

62

*Production( 5)
Ask ss some questions
Why did Ngas grandma have to light the
lamp?
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write s list of the thing that Ngas great grandma and great grandfather had to do in the
past
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak
Date of preparing: 05/10/2011

Period 22

Date of teaching:
8A : 11/10/2011
8B : 07/10/2011
8C : 07/10/2011

UNIT 4 : OUR PAST


Lesson 2 : Speak

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to talk about the differences
between the life in the past and now using the pictures
- Standard: talk about the differences between the life in the past and now using the
pictures
- Higher: talk about the differences in their house
+ Vocabulary: air(n); fresh(a) ; polluted(n)
+ Structures : There used to be + N
There didnt use to be + N
S + used to + V
S + didnt use to + V
2. Skills: Speaking skills: Make sentences describing and comparing
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to look up to their family members
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board
63

2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary


III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Divide the class into 2 teams and ask them
to play on the stage

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
* Networks

TV
rice cooker

walk
Things
in the
past

Vietname
se
folktales

lamp
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
*Pre- speaking(10)
Present the new words
1. New words
air(n)
fresh(a)
polluted(n)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves

Present the structures of used to

Observe listen and answer


2. Structures
- There used to be + N
Eg: There used to be small house
- There didnt use to be + N
Eg: There didnt use to be electricity
- S + used to + V
Eg: People used to walk to work
64

- S + didnt use to + V
Eg: Children didnt use to go to school
Pairwork
Hang the pictures and ask ss to practice in
exchange pairs
*While-speaking(17)
Go around the classroom to help ss practice Listen carefully and check
Ask students to practice in pairs before the Correct by themselves
class
Observe and listen carefully
Remark and correct the mispronunciation
* Answers:
Eg:
- The air used to be fresh, but now it is
polluted
- There didnt use to be buildings, but now
there are
- There didnt use to be supermarkets, but
now there are
- There didnt use to be cars, motorbikes,
but now there are
- People used to walk to work
* Post- speaking (10)
Now ask ss to look write 5 examples about
the things they used to do last year, guide
ss through the examples

Ask ss to pairwork
Ask some pairs to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Observe and listen carefully


Eg:
S1: Last year I used to get up late. Now I get
up early.
S2: OK. And Last year I used to go to school
late. Now I dont.
Listen carefully and check
Remark and correct
Observe and correct
Listen and answer

3.Homework(1)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
65

- Write a paragraph about themselves (part 2).


- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Listen
Date of preparing: 09/10/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 14/10/2011
8B : 11/10/2011
8C : 11/10/2011

UNIT 4 : OUR PAST

Period 23

Lesson 3 : Listen
I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to a folktale about and
choose the most suitable moral lesson
- Standard: Listen to a folktale and choose the most suitable moral lesson
- Higher: Answer some questions about the tale, tell some other similar tales they
know
+ Vocabulary: lay(v); discover(v) ; gold(n); shout(v); rich(a); amazement(n);
unfortunately(adv); dead(a) = kill(v); foolish(a); greedy(a); find(v) .
+ Structures: Past simple, once a (poor) farmer
2. Skills:
+ Listening: Listen to the folktale and choose the most suitable moral lesson
+ Speaking: Ask and answer some questions
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay healthy, eat sensibly and be tidy
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask: What did you do yesterday/ last week?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Divide the class into 2 teams and ask them
to play on the stage

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
* Networks
Vietnamese
folktales
66

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- listening(10)
Present the new words

1. New words
lay(v)
discover(v)
gold(n)
shout(v)
rich(a)
amazement(n)
unfortunately(adv)
dead(a) = kill(v)
foolish(a)
greedy(a)
find(v)

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Listen and correct by themselves
Ask ss to retell the structures of commands Observe listen and answer
2. Structures:
Once a farmer
Hang the picture and present the tale
Observe and listen
Ask ss to guess the moral lesson
Pairwork
Ask ss to give out their ideas
* While- listening (10)
Play the tape (3times)
Ask ss to give out their answers on the
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Post- listening (10)


Ask ss to answer some questions about the

Listen carefully and check


Listen carefully and check
Correct by themselves
Observe and listen carefully
* Answers:
c) Be happy with what you have.

Pairwork
67

tale
1) Did the farmer use the eggs to buy food
and clothing?
2) How many gold eggs did the husband
see?
3) Did they cut open all the chikens?
4) Did they find any eggs?
5) Were the chickens dead?
Ask ss to answer
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Listen carefully and check


Correct by themselves
* Suggested ideas:
1) Yes, he did
2) He saw one gold egg
3) Yes, they did
4) No, they didnt
5) Yes, they were

* Feed-back (3)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the story in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Read
Date of preparing: 10/10/2011

Period 24

Date of teaching:
8A : 15/10/2011
8B : 12/10/2011
8C : 14/10/2011

UNIT 4 : OUR PAST


Lesson 3 : Read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the tale
The lost shoe
- Standard: Read and complete the sentences (exercise 1) and answer the questions
(exercise 2)
- Higher : Write a summary of the tale
+ Vocabulary: Little Pea (n); Stout Nut (n); die (v) ; marry (v); cruel (a); upset (a);
festival (n); harvest (n) ; prince (n); fairy(n); rag(n); drop(v); loose(v); own(v).
68

+ Structures: Past simple


2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and complete the sentences (exercise 1) and
answer the questions (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty and kindness
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review past verbs and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2: What did you do last week?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5) Game: Networks
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks : Family members
mom
Family
members

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
How may characteristics are there in
The lost shoe?
Present some new words

dad

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)


1. New words
Little Pea (n)
Stout Nut (n)
die (v)
marry (v
cruel (a)
upset (a)
festival (n)
harvest (n)
prince (n)
fairy(n)
rag(n)
drop(v)
loose(v)
own(v).
69

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the past verbs in the tale
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently and check
the sentences
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
Listen and remember again
Read the tale silently
Use the information in the tale to check
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. Complete the sentences
Answers:
a) farmer
b) died
c) used, again
d) marry/choose
e) new clothes
f) lost

Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer Pairwork


the questions, notice ss about the
questions with was and did
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Observe and correct
Remark and give out the answer key
Correct by themselves
3. Answer
a) She was a poor farmers daughter
b) She made Little Pea do the chores all day
c) Before the festival started, a fairy appeared
and magically changed her rags into beautiful
clothes
d) The prince decided to marry the girl who
owned the lost shoe/ fitted the lost shoe
e) Ss answers
* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to summarize the tale
Listen and check
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
70

- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.


- Write 10 sentences about the tale
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
Date of preparing: 13/10/2011

Period 25

Date of teaching:
8A : 18/10/2011
8B : 18 /10/2011
8C : 15/10/2011

UNIT 4 : OUR PAST


Lesson 5 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a story using word cues
and the model story
- Standard: write a story using word cues and the model story
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the story
+ Vocabulary: graze (v); appear(v); leave(v); say(v); tie(v); ; light(v); escape(v);
servant(n); master(n); wisdom(n); return(v); straw(n); bring(v); stripe(n)
+ Structures: Structure of describing the position
On the other side
In the right corner
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model story
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the story
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love reading folktales
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 40 and ask: What did people use to do in the
past?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Pelmanism

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Pelmanism:
1

be

go

light

ask
71

went

asked

was/were

8
lit

*Key :
1- 7 ; 2- 5 ; 3- 8 ; 4- 6
Remark the game and ask
Today we are going to write a story How
the tiger got his stripes
*Pre- writing(10)
Give ss some necessary words

Observe and listen

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the story and complete it
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Show out the answers
2. Answers
1. appeared
2. was
3. said
4. left
5. went
6. tied
7. brought
8. burned
9. escaped

1. New words
graze (v)
appear(v)
leave(v)
say(v)
tie(v)
light(v)
escape(v)
servant(n)
master(n)
wisdom(n)
return(v)
straw(n)
bring(v)
stripe(n)

72

*While-writing(17)
Ask ss to imagine they are the farmer to
write their story
Guide ss to change the subjects , the
objects and the possesive adjectives from
the third person into the first preson
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss about the story
Remark and give out the answers
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Observe and listen


a farmer, the small man I
his my
him me
The others write on the drafting paper

Listen and copy


*Suggested writing:
One day, as I was in my field and my buffalo
was grazing nearby, a tiger appeared. The
tiger wanted to know why the strong buffalo
was the servant and I was the master. I said
I had something called wisdom but I left it
home that day. I went to get the wisdom, but
before that I tied the tiger to a tree with a
rope because I didnt want it to eat the
buffalo. When I returned, I brought some
straw with me. I said it was my wisdom. I lit
the straw and the fire burned the tiger. The
tiger escaped, but it still has black stripes
from the burns today
Listen and answer
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the story again in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
Date of preparing: 16/10/2011

Date of teaching:
73

8A : 21/10/2011
8B : 19/10/2011
8C : 18/10/2011

UNIT 4 : OUR PAST

Period 26

Lesson 6 : Language focus


I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Past simple
- Prepositions of time: on, in, at, after, before, between
- Used to
- Standard: Write the past form of the irregular verbs
Make questions for the answers
Complete the sentences using the prepositions of time
Complete the dialogue using the verb used to
- Higher : Ask and answer some morre questions
+ Vocabulary: news(n)
+ Structures: Prepositions of time: on, in, at, after, before, between
Past form of the irregular verbs
Used to
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

74

*Warm-up(6)
Ask ss to play the game Jumbled words

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
* Past simple(15)- Exercise 1+2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the form of the verbs on
the extra board

Three groups play on the stage


* Jumbled words:
unr run
ehav have
edri ride
tae eat
eakt take
Observe and listen

Listen and tell


*Key :
run
fly
take
go
have
do
be
ride
eat
sit
come
Observe and listen

ran
flew
took
went
had
did
was/were
rode
ate
sat
came

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


explain the aim
Ask ss to use the answers in part 2 to make Pairwork
questions
Ask some pairs to practice their sentences Listen and correct
Remark and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 2
* Answers:

1) Did you eat rice this morning?


75

2) I got to school by bus


3) Where were you last night?
4) I had Math, English and Music
*Prepositions of time (10) -( Exercise 3)
Ask ss to look at the table and present the
aim
Ask ss to tell the use of the prepositions of
time: on, in , at, between, after, before
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Used to (5) -( Exercise 4)


Ask ss to look at the pictures and present
the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (5)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Observe and listen


Listen and tell
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct

2. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
a) on
b) in
c) between
d)at, after
e) before
Observe and listen
Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
3. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
1) used to have
2) used to be
3) used to live
Listen and answer

3. Homework(3)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period: Unit 5: Getting started + Listen and read
76

Date of preparing: 19/10/2011

Period 27

Date of teaching:
8A : 22/10/2011
8B : 21/10/2011
8C : 21/10/2011

UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Report somones saying
- Give out the simple rerquests, commands and advice
- Listen to a dialogue to complete the report card
- Read the passage, understand it and answer the questions
- Write a formal letter using a word cues and model letter
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to
know about the results of studying thatv Tim did this semester
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and tick the True or False sentences then answer the
questions
- Higher: Give some reports about what Miss Jackson said to Tims mother
+ Vocabulary: report card(n) ; proud(a) + of ; improve (v); pronunciation(n) ;
sound(n); promise(v)
+ Structures : - Past simple tense
- Comands, requests, and advice in reported speech
- Modal: should
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

77

*Warm-up(5): Networks
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Three groups play on the stage


* Networks : Subjects at school
Art
Subjects at
school

Music

Remark the game


Give the correct answers.

*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene: you are
going to listen to Tim and his mothers
conversation, she is telling him about
his result of studying this semester

Observe and listen carefully


Observe and listen

Give ss the new words

1. New words
report card(n)
proud(a) + of
improve (v)
pronunciation(n)
sound(n)
promise(v)

Ask ss to repeat the new words in


chorus

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
78

Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present some new structures in the
dialogue

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue
before the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and
answer the questions using the
information from the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then
give out the answer key

2. Structures
+ Structures :
- Comands, requests, and advice in reported
speech
Eg: She asked me to give you this dictionary
- Modal: should
Eg: You should work harder on your
pronunciation
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Pairwork
Observe and rermark

3. Answer the questions


* Answers:
a) Miss Jackson is Tims Spanish teacher.
b) She gave her a report card
c) He worked really hard
d) She said he should work harder on his
pronunciation
e) She gave him a dictionary
Pairwork

Ask ss to work in pairs to check the


sentences
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then
give out the answer key

Listen
4. True or False
* Answers:

79

T
a
b
c
d
e
f

Listen and answer


*Production( 5)
Ask ss some questions
What does Tim do to improve his
Spanish pronunciation?
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen
Date of preparing: 19/10/2011

Period 28

Date of teaching:
8A : 25/10/2011
8B : 21/10/2011
8C : 22/10/2011

UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS


Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Make questions and answers about their studies
- Listen to dialogue and complete the report card
- Standard : Make questions and answers about their studies
Listen to dialogue and complete the report card
80

- Higher: Ask some questions about the dialogue


+ Vocabulary: grade(n); miss(v) ; due to(conj); sickness(n); attendance(n);
participation(n); co-operation(n); satisfactory(a); listening comprenhension; encourage(v);
cassette(n); borrow(v); appreciate(v)
+ Structures: Past simple tense
2. Skills:
+ Speaking: Make questions and answers
+ Listening: Listen to the conversation and fill the information in the report card
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Brainstorming"
Divide the students into two teams and
ask them to play

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


Think of the words that belong to the subjects
at school
Math

Music
Subjects

*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the aim through the table
Ask ss to look at the questions and the
suggested answers below
Guide ss to answer the questions

Subjects

Listen and tell


1. Examples
- When do you do your homework?
- I do my homework after dinner
- Who helps you with your homework?
- My brother helps me with my homework
- How much time do you spend on Math?
- I spend two hours
81

- Which subject do you need to improve?


- I need to improve Physics
- What do you do to improve your English?
- I do a lot of exercises, read E stories, listen
to the cassette, talk E as much as possible
*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs the model dialogue
in pairs.
Ask ss to practice
Ask 6 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct answers

Pairwork
Pairwork
Observe and remark
* Answers:
Observe and listen carefully

* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the extra board and present the
Listen carefully
situation: Now listen to the conversations
and complete the report card
Ask ss to discuss about the information in Pairwork
the report card
Ask ss to give out their ideas
Explain the meaning of : behavior
participation, comment, marking period
Give the new words
2. Listen
* New words:
grade(n)
miss(v)
due to(conj)
sickness(n)
attendance(n)
participation(n)
co-operation(n)
satisfactory(a)
listening comprenhension
encourage(v)
cassette(n)
borrow(v)
appreciate(v)
Ask ss to repeat the new words alould
Repeat alould
Ask 2 ss to read and correct the mistakes Listen and correct by themselves
*While-listening (8)
Play the tape ( 3 times)
Listen carefully and complete the card
82

Share and compare with their partner


Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct answers

Observe and correct


Correct by themselves
* Key:
1) 87
2) 5
3) S
4) C
5) A
6) A
7) B

* Post-listening (2)
Ask some ss to practice some questions
about the dialogue

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Work in pairs
* Suggestions :
- How is Sarahs listening?
- Its excellent

Listen and answer

3.Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make questions and answers about part Speak
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
Date of preparing: 23/10/2011

Period 29

Date of teaching:
8A : 25/10/2011
8B : 25/10/2011
8C : 25/10/2011

UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS


Lesson 3 : Read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text
about how students learn new words
83

- Standard: Understand the new words, scan the text and find out the main ways that
language learners use to learn new words, tick the true or false sentences
- Higher: Answer some additional questions
+ Vocabulary: list (n); meaning (n); mother tongue (n) ; learn by heart (v); stick (v);
so as to (conj); come across (v); underline (v) ; highlight (v); revise(v); revision(n);
necessary(a); piece of paper, term(n).
+ Structures: Present simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Scan the text and make a list of things that language
learners use to learn new words
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, learn and revise the new words regularly
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review present verbs and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2: When do you do your home work?
What do you do to improve your English?
2. The new lesson

Teachers activities
* Warm-up (8) Game: Chatting
Ask 3 groups to discuss
Ask ss to give out their ideas
Remark and present the new lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
Present some new words

Students activities
Three groups discuss
* Chatting : How do you learn English new
words?
Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)
1. New words
list (n)
meaning (n)
mother tongue (n)
learn by heart (v)
stick (v)
so as to (conj) = in order to (conj)
come across (v)
underline (v)
84

highlight (v)
revise(v)
revision(n)
necessary(a)
piece of paper
term(n)
Ask ss to repeat in chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* While-reading(15)
Ask ss to scan the text silently and get
the main information
Ask ss to write their answers on the board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
Read the tale silently
Underline the main information
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. How do they learn new words?
Answers:
- Make a list and write in mother tongue and
try to learn them by heart
- Write one or two examples sentences with each
new word in order to remember how to use the
words in the right way
- Write on a small piece of paper and stick it
somewhere in their house to learn it at any time
- Underline or highlight the words

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to tick the true or false sentences
Ask ss to answer and correct

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Pairwork
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
3. Answer
a) F: Some learners write the meaning of new
words in their mother tongue
b) T
c) F: Many learners dont learn all the new
words they come across
d): T
Listen and answer
85

3. Homework(1)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write the list again and find out the best one
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period: Part Read(cont)
Date of preparing: 24/10/2011

Period 30

Date of teaching:
8A : 28/10/2011
8B : 26/10/2011
8C : 28/10/2011

UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS


Lesson 4 : Read(cont)

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to reread the text about how
students learn new words then answer the questions
- Standard: Read and answer the questions (exercise 2)
- Higher: Answer some more questions about themselves
+ Vocabulary: review in the previous period
+ Structures: Present simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and answer the questions (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and scientifically
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review present verbs and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss: How do you learn new words?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5) Game: Hangman
Ask ss to play the game Hangman

Students activities
The whole class play together
* Hangman : This is one of the ways you learn
new words

_________
86

Key : highlight

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
Ask ss to retell the words the words they
learnt in the last period
Remark and correct the mistake
* While-reading(15)
Ask ss to read the text silently again and
answer the questions
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

* Post-reading (7)
Ask ss to discuss the question: How
should I learn new words?

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and tell

Listen and answer


Read the tale silently
Use the information to answer
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
1. Answer
a) No, they dont. They learn words in different
ways
b) Because they want to learn how to use the
word in the right way
c) Some learners write each word and its use on
asmall piece of paper and stick it somewhere in
their house to learn it at any time
dBecause they want to remember the important
words
e) revision is necessary in learning words
2. How should I learn words?
* Suggestions:
- Write new words on a small piece of paper
- Highlight
- Underline
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write the sentences about how to learn new words
87

- Do exercises in the workbook


- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
Date of preparing: 26/10/2011

Period 31

Date of teaching:
8A : 29/10/2011
8B : 28/10/2011
8C : 29/10/2011

UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS


Lesson 5 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a formal letter using word
cues and the model letter
- Standard: write a letter using word cues and the model letter
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the letter
+ Vocabulary: enjoyable (a); result(n); The Lunar New Year Festival(n); celebrate(v);
regards(n);
+ Structures: Structure of a formal letter
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model letter
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the letter
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and care about their friends
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points, structures of a formal letter and vocabulary, a
sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(3)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 40 and ask: What did you do to improve your
English?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Pelmanism

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Pelmanism:
1

have

get

tell

be
88

got

told

was/were

had

*Key :
1- 8 ; 2- 5 ; 3- 6 ; 4- 7
Remark the game and ask
Today we are going to write a letter to tell
our friends about the results of study in
this semester
*Pre- writing(10)
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read Hoas letter to Tim and ask
-

Observe and listen

1. New words
enjoyable (a)
result(n)
The Lunar New Year Festival(n)
celebrate(v)
regards(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Listen and answer

Who writes this letter?


Who will receive it?
How many parts does it have?
What did Hoa tell Tim?

Ask ss to give out their answers


Remark and correct
Observe and listen
Present the aim and the form of the letter
Explain the content of each part
Present the letter ss are going to write
Ask ss to use the words in part 2 and Hoas 2. Form of a formal letter
letter to write
1. Heading: The writers address and the
date
2. Opening: Dear,
3. Body of the letter
4. Closing: Your friend/ Regards/ Love
*While-writing(17)
89

Ask ss to write their letter


Guide ss to change the subjects, the
objects and the possesive adjectives
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss about the letter
Remark and give out the answers
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Observe and listen


The others write on the drafting paper

Listen and copy


*Suggested writing:
20 Le Loi St.
Ha Noi
October 28, 2011
DearDonna,
Thanks for your letter. Im pleased to hear
you had a happy Mothers Day.
I received my second semester report last
month. I got good grades for Geography,
Physics and Math, but my English and
History were poor. My teacher told me to
improve English and History.
In a few weeks, we are going to celebrate
the Mid-Autumn Festival or Moon Festival.
We are going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt
and uncle by bus this afternoon .Ill send
you a postcard from there.
Write soon and tell me all your news
Love,
Lan
Listen and answer
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the letter again in the notebook
90

- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus


Date of preparing: 30/10/2011

Period 32

Date of teaching:
8A : 01/11/2011
8B : 01/11/2011
8C : 01/11/2011

UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS


Lesson 6 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Adverbs of manner
- Modal: should
- Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
- Standard: Complete the dialogues using the adverbs of manner
Report the sentences
- Higher: Report some morre sentences
+ Vocabulary: soft(a); office(n); conversation(n); passage(n); pronounce(v) sore
throat(n)
+ Structures: - Adverbs of manner
- Modal: should
- Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Pelmanism

Students activities

* Pelmanism:
1
good

fast

hard

bad
91

fast

hard

well

badly

*Key :
1- 7 ; 2- 5 ; 3- 6 ; 4- 8
Remark the game and present the new
lesson

Observe and listen

* Adverbs of manner(10)- Exercise 1


Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Listen and tell
Ask ss to retell the form of the adverbs on
the extra board. Present some special cases
*Key :
of adverbs: good, hard, late, early
bad
slow
hard
good
Ask ss to look at the model dialogue and
explain the aim
Ask ss to use the adverbs in the box to
complete the dialogues
Ask some pairs to practice their dialogues
Remark and correct

badly
slowly
hard
well

Observe and listen


Pairwork
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) hard
2) fast
3) badly
4) softly

*Commands, requests(25) -( Exercise


3+4)
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
present the aim
Ask ss to tell the forms of commands,

Observe and listen


Listen and tell
92

requests, and advice in reported speech


Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (3)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
2. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
a) Miss Jacson told me to wait for her
outside her office
b) Miss Jacson told me to give you your
report card for this semester
c) Miss Jacson asked me to help you with
your Spanish pronunciation
d)Miss Jacson asked me to meet her next
week
e) Miss Jacson asked me to
3. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
1) Miss Jacson said you should spend more
time on Spanish pronunciation
2) Miss Jacson said you should practice
speaking Spanish everyday
3) Miss Jacson said you should listen to
Spanish conversations on TV
4) Miss Jacson said you shouldpractice
reading aloud passages in Spanish
5) Miss Jacson said you should use this
dictionary to find out how to pronounce
Spanish words
Listen and answer

3. Homework(1)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period: Unit 6: Getting started + Listen and read
Date of preparing: 05/11/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 07/11/2011
93

8B : 07/11/2011
8C : 07/11/2011
Period 33

UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Talk about plans, intentions in the future
- Ask for and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance
- Listen to the song to fill in the missing words
- Read the passage, fill in the information and answer the questions
- Write a formal letter using a word cues and model letter
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to
know about the things that ss have to do when enrolling for an activity at school in the
summer
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and complete Ngas details
- Higher: Ask some questions about Nga
+ Vocabulary: enrol(v) + for ; application form(n); fill (v); hobby(n) ; draw(v);
sign(v); bring(v); interest(n)
+ Structures : - Past simple tense, present simple with future meaning
- Gerunds: V(ing)
- Modal: may, can, could
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and take part in outdoor activities regularly
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5): Networks
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Networks : Activities of Y&Y
94

Helping poor children

Activities of
Y&Y

Remark the game


Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the picture set the scene: you are
going to listen to Nga and the secretarys
conversation, she is guiding her to enrol
for an activity this summer
Give ss the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present some new structures in the
dialogue

Observe and listen carefully


Observe and listen

1. New words
enrol(v) + for
application form(n)
fill (v)
hobby(n)
draw(v)
sign(v)
bring(v)
interest(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
- Present simple with future meaning
Eg: Im enrolling for the activities this
95

summer
- Gerunds:
Eg: I like drawing

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions using the information from
the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Pairwork
Observe and rermark

3. Complete Ngas details


* Answers:
Name: Nga
Home address: 5 Tran
Phu street
Phone number: no
phone at home

Date of birth: April


22, 1989
Sex: femail
Interests: drawing,
outdoor activities and
acting

Listen and answer


*Production( 5)
Ask ss some questions
What is her name?
Where does she live?
When was she born?
What are her hobbies?
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

96

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen
Date of preparing: 06/11/2011

Period 34

Date of teaching:
8A : 08/11/2011
8B : 08/11/2011
8C : 08/11/2011

UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB


Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Ask for and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance
- Listen to song Children of the World unite and fill in the missing words
- Standard : Ask for and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance
Listen to song and fill in the missing words
- Higher: Sing the song
+ Vocabulary: favor(n); of course; assistance(n); offer(v); respond(v); may(v); unite( v)
shout(v); hold(v).
+ Structures: Modals: can, could, may
2. Skills:
+ Speaking: Ask for and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance
+ Listening: Listen to the song and fill in the words
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson

97

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Networks"
Divide the students into two teams and
ask them to play

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


Think of the modal verbs
Can

Can
Modals

*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the aim through the table
Ask ss to look at the models and the
suggested answers in the table

Modals

Listen carefully
1. New words
favor(n)
of course
assistance(n)
offer(v)
respond(v)
may(v)

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present the new structures to ask for and
respond to the favors

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
Asking for favors
- Can/ Could you
help me?
- Could you do me a
favor?
- I need a favor

Responding to favors
- Certainly/ Of
course/ Sure
- No problem
- What can I do for
you?
- How can I help
you?
- Im sorry. Im busy
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
98

Remark and correct the mistake


Present the new structures to offer and
respond to the assistance

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs to ask for and
respond to favors.
Ask 6 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct answers
* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the extra board and present the
situation: Now listen to the song
Children of the World unite and fill in
the missing words
Ask ss to discuss about the structures of a
song
Ask ss to read the song and guess the
words in some blanks
Ask ss to give out their ideas
Explain the meaning of : unite, hold,
peace, right, stand, show, north, south,
world,
*While-listening (8)
Play the tape ( 3 times)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct answers

Asking for
assistance
- May I help you?
- Do you need any
help?
- Let me help you

Responding to
assistance
- Yes, thats very
kind of you
- No thank you

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
Pairwork
Observe, listen and remark
Observe and listen carefully
Listen carefully
Pairwork

3. Listen
Listen carefully and complete the card
Share and compare with their partner
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
* Key:
1) unite
2) peace
3) right
4) love
5) north
99

6) south
7) of
8) world
9) show
10) place
11) out
12) stand
13) world
* Post-listening (2)
Ask ss to sing the song
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Sing together
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make questions and answers about part Speak
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
Date of preparing: 07/11/2011

Period 35

Date of teaching:
8A : 10/11/2011
8B : 09/11/2011
8C : 11/11/2011

UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB


Lesson 3 : Read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text
about Y&Y
- Standard: Fill in the missing information and answer the questions
- Higher: Answer some additional questions
+ Vocabulary: build (v); citizenship (n); skill (n) ; organization (n); social (a); develop
(v); awareness (n); personality (n) ; guideline (n)
+ Structures: Present simple and past simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension:
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, take part in communicative acivities
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review present verbs and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
100

Check ss prreparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (8) Game: Chatting
Ask 3 groups to discuss
Ask ss to give out their ideas
Remark and present the new lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
Present some new words

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* While-reading(15)
Ask ss to scan the text silently and get
the main information
Ask ss to write their answers on the board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Ask ss to ask and answer the questions


about the text
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Students activities
Three groups discuss
* Chatting : What do you know about Youth
Union?
Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)
1. New words
build (v)
citizenship (n)
skill (n)
organization (n)
social (a)
develop (v)
awareness (n)
personality (n)
guideline (n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read the tale silently
Underline the main information
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. Fill in the missing words
*Answers:
a)March 26th 1931
b) December 1976
c) their public awareness and form their
personality
d) the guidelines
Pairwork
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
3. Answer
a) One can join the Youth Union at the age of 16
101

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to tick the true or false sentences
Ask ss to answer and correct
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

b) It was founded on March 26th 1931


c) It is Vietnam Communist Youth Union
d)Helping the Handicapped, Cleaning the
environment, Green summer volunteers
campaign
e) They aim to help the young develop their
public awareness and form thei personality
f) Its aims and principles established the
guidelines for the Vietnamese youth
Listen and answer

3. Homework(1)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Ask and answer the questions again in the book
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
Date of preparing: 08/11/2011

Period 36

Date of teaching:
8A : 11/11/2011
8B : 10/11/2011
8C : 11/11/2011

UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB


Lesson 4 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a formal letter using word
cues and the model letter
- Standard: write a letter using word cues and the model letter
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the letter
+ Vocabulary: plan (v); community(n); encourage(v); recycle(v); natural resources(n);
earn(v); sidewalk(n); register(v); raise fund(v)
+ Structures: Structure of a formal letter
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model letter
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the letter
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and save environment
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
102

2. Students: review the grammar points, structures of a formal letter and vocabulary, a
sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(2)
What do you do to save the environment?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
* Networks:
Think of the things Y&Y do to protect the
environment
collect
bottles
G1

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a letter to tell
our parents about what we are going to do
*Pre- writing(12)
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the passage and ask ss to
complete the letter
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

G2

plant trees
Observe and listen
1. New words
plan (v)
community(n)
encourage(v)
recycle(v)
natural resources(n)
earn(v)
sidewalk(n)
register(v)
raise fund(v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Listen and answer
* Key:
1. community
2. recycling
103

3. collect
4. send
5. recycling
6. save
7. earn
8. participating
9. planting
10. helping
Present the aim and the form of the letter
Present the letter ss are going to write
Ask ss to read the dialogue in part 2 and
help Hoa to write the letter to her parents

Observe and listen

*While-writing(17)
2. Write
Ask ss to write their letter
Guide ss to change the subjects, the objects
and the possesive adjectives
Observe and listen
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
The others write on the drafting paper
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers
Listen and copy
*Suggested writing:
Dear Mom and Dad,
Im glad to tell you that Im going to have
interesting activities at school.
The Y&Y Green Group is planning tohelp
the community. I will participate in its
environment month program. In this
program, we will clean the banks of the
lakes on weekends. Then we will plant trees
and flowers in the school garden and water
them every afternoon after class. And we
will plant young trees and plants to sell to
some schools.
I hope we will give more green color to the
city and earn some money for our school
Y&Y Green Group. It ist really interesting,
isnt it?
104

Write to me soon and tell me all your news


Love,
Hoa
* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss about the letter
Remark and give out the answers
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer


Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the letter again in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
Date of preparing: 09/11/2011

Period 37

Date of teaching:
8A : 12/11/2011
8B : 11/11/2011
8C : 12/11/2011

UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB


Lesson 5: Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Present simple with future meaning
- Gerunds
- Modals: may, can, could
- Standard: Ask and answer about the Y&Y spring activity program
Talk about their friends hobbies
Ask for favors and respond to themby ccompleting the dialogues
- Higher: Make some morre situations to ask for and respond to favors
+ Vocabulary: gather(v); support(v); cultural(a); ticket(n); across(prep); orphanage(n)
+ Structures: - Present simple with future meaning
- Gerunds
- Modals: may, can, could
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendlyand save the environment
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
105

2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper


III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Brainstorming

Students activities

* Brainstorming:
What do you do to recycle things?
Observe and listen

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
* Present simple tense with future
meaning(10)- Exercise 1
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the form of present simple. Listen and tell
Present the new use of present simple with
future meaning
Ask ss to look at the model dialogue repeat
in chorus
Ask ss to use the information in the box to
make similar dialogues
Ask some pairs to practice their dialogues
Remark and correct
*Commands, requests(18) -( Exercise 2)
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
Observe and listen
present the aim
Present the forms of of gerund after some
verbs: like, love, hate, dislike, enjoy
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers
1. Exercise 2
* Answers:

1) Ba hates cooking meals but he likes


performing music
106

2) Lan likes cooking meals and performing


music
3) Ba doesnt like gardening but he likes
gathering broken glasses
4) Lan doesnt like gardening but she likes
gathering broken glasses
5) Ba likes watching TV and he loves
camping
6) Lan Lan loves watching TV and she likes
camping
7) Ba hates playing badminton but he likes
doing his homework
8) Lan doesnt like playing badminton and
she hates doing her homeework
*Modals: can, could, may(12) ( Exercise 3)
Ask ss to look at the box and present the
aim
Guide ss to do the exercise

Observe and listen

Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to


Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Listen and correct

Ask ss to complete part b


* Feed-back (3)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and tell the way to ask for and


respond to favors and assistance
Do on the drafting paper

2. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
A) buy a ticket
B) take me across the road
C) help me with my Math problem
D) water the flowers in the garden
Listen and answer
Listen and answer

3. Homework(1)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period: : Review

107

Date of preparing: 13/11/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 15/11/2011
8B : 15/11/2011
8C : 15/11/2011

Period 38
REVISION
I. The aims of the lesson
1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary from Unit 4 to Unit 6
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme personal information
+ Structures :
- Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning
- used to
- Prepositions of time
- Modals: should, can could, may
- Adverbs of manner
- Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
- Gerunds
2. Skills: 4 skills
3 . Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, exercises
2. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary from unit 4-6
III. The stages of the lesson
1.The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (2)
Say hello to the students
How are you?

Students activities
Listen and answer

108

Today were going to review the main


grammar points and vocabulary from unit
4 to unit 6
* Review(30)
Ask ss to retell the use, forms of past
simple and present simple tense
Listen and retell
1. Past simple tense, used to and present
simple with future meaning
Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss
discuss to make examples
Remark and correct
Ask the class to retell the prepositions of
time, the use of each one and make 2
examples on the board
Remark and correct
Ask the class to retell the modal verbs
Remark and correct

Ask the class to retell the use, form


adverbs of manner
Remark and correct

Three groups make and show out their


sentences

2. Prepositions of time
Eg:
She plays chess on Sunday
She plays chess in the evening
3. Modals: should, can could, may
Eg: Can you help me, please?
Could you do me a favor?
May I help you?
You should work harder on your Spanish
pronunciation
4. Adverbs of manner
soft
careful
fast
hard
good

softly
carefully
fast
hard
well

Eg: He plays soccer well


She swims carefully
Ask the class to retell the forms of
commands, requests and advice in
reported speech

Listen and answer


5. Commands, requests and advice in
109

of questions and how to answer them


Remark and correct

Ask the class to retell the forms of


gerunds
Remark and correct

reported speech
Eg: She asked me to open the door
She told me to give you this book
She said you should work harder on your
speaking
6. Gerunds
Listen and answer
Eg: She likes playing soccer

* Feed-back(3)
Ask ss to tell the main grammar points Listen and answer
that thay have to review

3. Homework (2)
Review from unit 4 to unit 6 to prepare for the next lesson: Test 45 minutes
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 14/11/2011

Period 39

Date of teaching:
8A : 18/11/2011
8B : 16/11/2011
8C : 18/11/2011

TEST
Time: 45 minutes

I.The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges

110

+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, the teacher will check ss vocabulary, grammar
and knowledges from unit 4 to unit 6
+ Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 4 to unit 6
+ Structures:
- Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning
- used to
- Prepositions of time
- Modals: should, can could, may
- Adverbs of manner
- Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
- Gerunds
2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
II. Matrix
1. For class 8B and 8C

Tn
Ch

Listening

Nhn bit
TNKQ

Thng hiu
TL

TNKQ

TL

Cng
5 cu
1,5 =
15%

Our past
(Tick True/
False )
5 cu x
0,5=2,5

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

The young
pioneers club,
Our past,
Study habits
(Multiple
choice)
4 cu x 0,5 =
2,0

Vocabulary

Writing

TL

Study habits
(Tick True/ False )
5 cu x 0.3 = 1,5

Reading

Grammar

Vn dng
TN
KQ

4 cu
2= 20%

The young pioneers


club, Our past,
Study habits
(Multiple choice)
5 cu x 0.5 = 2,5

5 cu
2,5 =
25%
The young

5 cu

111

S cu
S im

10 cu
4,0 im= 40%

4 cu
2,0 im=20%

5 cu
2,5 im=
25%

pioneers
club
(Rearrange
the words )
5 cu x 0,3
= 1,5
5 cu
1,5 im=
15%

1,5 =
15%

24 cu
100%

I. Preparations
1.Teacher : photo the tests : 68 sheets
2. Students: review from unit 4 to unit 6, drafting paper.
* Questions
I. Listen to the dialogue and check the True or False statements ( 1,5 points)
T

1. Lan missed 4 days of school last semester


2. Her listening is good
3. Her reading is fair
4. Her speaking is good
5. Her writing is excellent
II. Read the passage and check the True or False sentences (2,5 points)
Nam: Who is this, grandpa?
Grandpa: Its me. I used to live in the country with my parents
Nam: What did you use to do then?
Grandpa: I stayed home and helped my Dad. I used to work on the farm with my
father
Nam: Didnt you use to go to school?
Grandpa: No, I didnt .
Nam: How many hours did you use to work a day?
Grandpa: About 10 to 12 hours a day
Nam: Oh! That sounds so hard
Check the True or False sentences
T
1. Nams grandfather used to live in the city
2. Nams grandmother used to stay home and help her dad
3. He used to work in the field
4. He used to go to school
5. He used to work from ten to thirteen hours a day
112

III. Choose the most suitable word to complete the sentences (2points)
1. .. I help you?
a. Can
b. May
c. Could
d. Should
2. I like drawing, outdoor activities and acting. Those are my

a. favors
b. pastimes
c. hobbies
d. habits
3. I received my English2 days agoIt was excellent
a. report
b. letter
c. dictionary
d. application form
4. Collecting used paper, glass, can to send
for.
a. cycling
b. reusing
c. reducing
d.recycling
IV. Choose the most suitable answer to complete the sentences (2,5points)
1. They lovevolleyball
a. play
b. playing
c. to play
d. played
2. He is going to Ha Long Bay ..May
a. on
b. at
c. of
d. in
3. Miss Lan asked me .you this story
a. gives
b. giving
c. give
d. to give
4. They ..noodles this morning
a. ate
b. eat
c. eats
d. will eat
5. I my homework in the morning last year
a. use to do
b. used to do
c. use do
d. used do
V. Rearrange the words to make meaningful sentences (1,5 points)
1. is / planning / Y&Y/ to / The / activities / interesting / have/
2. going / are / collect / they / used paper /cans /and/
3. going / they / to / are / for / send / recycling /them/
4. hope / will /they /money /save /they /earn /and / environment /the/
5. is / very/ interesting/ it?
* Answer keys:
I. 0,3 x 0,5= 1,5 points.
Tapetranscript:
This is Lans report card for last semester. She missed six days of school due to
sickness. Her listening is good. Her writing is good, too. Her reading is excellent and her
speaking is fair.
1. F
2. T
3. F
4. F
5. F
II.5x0,5 = 2,5 points
1. T
2. F
113

3. F
4. F
5. F
III. 4x0,5= 2 points
1.b ; 2. c ; 3.a ; 4. d
IV. 5x0,5= 2,5 points
4. b ; 2. d ; 3.d ; 4. a ; 5. b
V. 4x0,5= 2 points
1. The Y&Y is planning to have interesting activities
2. They are going to collect used paper and cans
3. They are going to send them for recycling
4. They hope they will earn money and save the environment
5. Is it very interesting?
2. For class 8A
Tn
Ch

Listening

Nhn bit
TNKQ

Thng hiu
TL

TNKQ

Vn dng
TL

Study habits
(Tick True/ False )
5 cu x 0.3 = 1,5

TN
KQ

TL

Cng
5 cu
1,5 =
15%

Our past
(Answer
the
questions )
5 cu x
0,5=2,5

Reading

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

The young
pioneers club,
Our past,
Study habits
Vocabulary
(Multiple
choice)
4 cu x 0,5 =
2,0

Grammar

The young pioneers


club, Our past,
Study habits
(Multiple choice)
5 cu x 0.5 = 2,5

4 cu
2= 20%

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

114

Writing

S cu
S im

10 cu
4,0 im= 40%

4 cu
2,0 im=20%

5 cu
2,5 im=
25%

The young
pioneers
club
(Write
sentences
using the
information
in the table )
5 cu x 0,3
= 1,5
5 cu
1,5 im=
15%

5 cu
1,5 =
15%

24 cu
100%

I. Preparations
1.Teacher : photo the tests : 34 sheets
2. Students: review from unit 4 to unit 6, drafting paper.
* Questions
I. Listen to the passage and answer the questions ( 1,5 points)
T
1. Lan missed 4 days of school last semester
2. Her listening is good
3. Her reading is fair
4. Her speaking is good
5. Her writing is excellent

II. Read the passage and answer the questions (2,5 points)
Nam: Who is this, grandpa?
Grandpa: Its me. I used to live in the country with my parents
Nam: What did you use to do then?
Grandpa: I stayed home and helped my Dad. I used to work on the farm with my
father
Nam: Didnt you use to go to school?
Grandpa: No, I didnt .
Nam: How many hours did you use to work a day?
Grandpa: About 10 to 12 hours a day
Nam: Oh! That sounds so hard
Questions:
115

1. Who used to live in the country?


2. Did Nams grandfather use to stay home and help his dad?
3. Where did he use to work?
4. Did he use to go to school?
5. How many hours a day did he use to work?
III. Choose the most suitable word to complete the sentences (2points)
1. .. I help you?
a. Can
b. May
c. Could
d. Should
2. I like drawing, outdoor activities and acting. Those are my

a. favors
b. pastimes
c. hobbies
d. habits
3. I received my English2 days agoIt was excellent
a. report
b. letter
c. dictionary
d. application form
4. Collecting used paper, glass, can to send
for.
a. cycling
b. reusing
c. reducing
d.recycling IV. Choose the
most suitable answer to complete the sentences (2,5points)
1. They lovevolleyball
a. play
b. playing
c. to play
d. played
2. He is going to Ha Long Bay ..May
a. on
b. at
c. of
d. in
3. Miss Lan asked me .you this story
a. gives
b. giving
c. give
d. to give
4. They ..noodles this morning
a. ate
b. eat
c. eats
d. will eat
5. I my homework in the morning last year
a. use to do
b. used to do
c. use do
d. used do
V. Use the words to make meaningful sentences (1,5 points)
1. The Y&Y/ be / plan / to / have/ interesting / activities.
2. They/ be / going / to / collect / used paper / cans.
3. They / be / going / to / send / them / for / recycle.
4. They / hope / they / will / earn / money / save / environment.
5. It/ be / very / interesting?
* Answer keys:
I. 0,3 x 0,5= 1,5 points.
Tapetranscript:
This is Lans report card for last semester. She missed six days of school due to
sickness. Her listening is good. Her writing is good, too. Her reading is excellent and her
speaking is fair.
1. F
2. T
116

3. F
4. F
5. F
II.5x0,5 = 2,5 points
1. Nams grandfather used to live in the country
2. Yes, he did
3. He used to work on the farm
4. No, he didnt
5. He used to work from ten to twelve hours a day
III. 4x0,5= 2 points
1.b ; 2. c ; 3.a ; 4. d
IV. 5x0,5= 2,5 points
1b ; 2. d ; 3.d ; 4. a ; 5. b
V. 4x0,5= 2 points
1. The Y&Y is planning to have interesting activities
2. They are going to collect used paper and cans
3. They are going to send them for recycling
4. They hope they will earn money and save the environment
5. Is it very interesting?
Date of preparing: 16/11/2011

Period 40

Date of teaching:
8A : 19/11/2011
8B : 18/11/2011
8C : 19/11/2011

CORRECTING THE TEST

I.The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected
and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in
the next lessons
+ Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 4 to unit 6
+ Structures:
- Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning
- used to
- Prepositions of time
- Modals: should, can could, may
- Adverbs of manner
- Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
117

- Gerunds
2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
II.Preparations
1.Teacher give points to the tests
2. Students: review from unit 4 to unit 6.
III. The stages of the lesson
1.The old lesson check- up(1)
Check ss preparations
2.The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

* Pre-correcting (10)
Give the tests to ss
Remark the tests generally through the main Get and observe
Observe and listen carefully
mistakes in each part of the test
* While- correcting(30)
Go through each part of the test, ask ss to
point out the correct answer of each
sentence, and explain why

Look at each part of the test, point out the


correct answer of each sentence, and
explain why
I. 0,3 x 0,5= 1,5 points.
Tapetranscript:
This is Lans report card for last
semester. She missed six days of school
due to sickness. Her listening is good. Her
writing is good, too. Her reading is
excellent and her speaking is fair.
1. F
2. T
3. F
4. F
5. F
5. T
II. 5x0,5 = 2,5 points (8B+8C)
1. T
2. F
3. F
4. F
5. F
II. 5x0,5 = 2,5 points (8A)
118

1. Nams grandfather used to live in the


country
2. Yes, he did
3. He used to work on the farm
4. No, he didnt
5. He used to work from ten to twelve
hours a day
III. 4x0,5= 2 points
1.b ; 2. c ; 3.a ; 4. d
IV. 5x0,5= 2,5 points
1b ; 2. d ; 3.d ; 4. a ; 5. b
V. 4x0,5= 2 points(8B+8C)
1. His name is Nam.
2. He 13 years old.
3. He lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
4. He is tall and thin and has short black
hair.
5. He is sociable and humorous
V. 4x0,5= 2 points(8A)
1. The Y&Y is planning to have
interesting activities
2. They are going to collect used paper
and cans
3. They are going to send them for
recycling
4. They hope they will earn money and
save the environment
5. Is it very interesting?

* Post-correcting( 2)
Ask ss to tell what they could and could not Listen and tell out
do in the test and know the way to improve
the knowlege in the next test
* Feed- back(1)
Remind the thing that ss did well and they
did badly in the test.

Listen and remember

3. Homework (1)
- Do the test again in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 7: Getting started + Listen and read
Date of preparing: 19/11/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 22/11/2011
119

8B : 22/11/2011
8C : 22/11/2011
Period 41

UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD
Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Compare the characters, quality of people or things
- Ask and answer about the price of sending a parcel
- Listen to a folktale to choose the right moral lesson
- Read the text about a shopping mall and check the True or False
information and answer the questions
- Write a class notice using a word cues and a model notice
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to
know how Nams neighborhood is
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and complete the sentences
- Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue
+ Vocabulary: since(prep) ; area(n); serve (v); tasty(a) ; pancake(n); try(v)
+ Structures : - Past simple tense
- Present perfect with since and for
- Comparision with: like, (not) asas, (not) the same as, different
from
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly to their neighbors
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson

Teachers activities

Students activities

120

*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

places
in Ha
Noi
Two groups play on the stage
hotel
places
around your
house

park
Remark the game
Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene: you are
going to listen to Nam and Na- the new
comer about Nams neighborhood
Give ss the new words

Observe and listen carefully


Observe and listen

1. New words
since(prep)
area(n)
serve (v)
tasty(a)
pancake(n)
try(v)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Present the new structures in the dialogue 2. Structures


- Present perfect with since and for
Eg: I have lived here since last week
I have lived here for a week
I have been here since last week
S + have/has + V(ed)/ VPII + since/ for

121

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue
before the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the
sentences using the information from the
dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

*Production( 5)
Ask ss some open questions
- Is Na new around the neighborhood?
- When did she and her family arrive?
- How long has Nam lived here?
- How does Nas mother feel?
- What are the pancakes like?
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Pairwork

Observe and rermark


3. Complete the sentences
* Answers:
a) new
b) last week
c) tired
d) restaurant
e) Hue
f) pancakes
Pairwork
Listen and answer

Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write a short passage about Na
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy

122

+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 21/11/2011

Period 42

Date of teaching:
8A : 25/11/2011
8B : 23/11/2011
8C : 25/11/2011

UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD
Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Ask and answer about the price of sending a letter, a postcard or a parcel
- Listen to the dialogue and fill in the advertisement a phrase from the box
- Standard : Ask and answer about the price of sending a letter, a postcard or a parcel
Listen to the dialogue and fill in the advertisement a phrase from the box
- Higher: Ask some more questions about the dialogue
+ Vocabulary: parcel(n); surface mail(n); airmail(n); contest(n); ground(n);
photographer(n); channel( n); match(n); exhibition(n).
+ Structures: I want to send this parcel to Quy Nhon
How much is airmail?
Whats on this week?
2. Skills:
+ Speaking: Ask and answer about the price of sending a letter, a postcard or a parcel
+ Listening: Listen to the dialogue and fill in the advertisement a phrase from the box
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be polite at the post office
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
123

Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Take a survey"

Students activities
* Take a survey:
S1: How much is a/an?
S2: Itsdong (They are dong)
a pen

*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the aim through the tapicture
Ask ss to look at the model dialogue
Present the new words

ten English
books

an icecream

a stamp

an envelop

Observe and listen carefully

1. New words
parcel(n)
surface mail(n)
airmail(n)
contest(n)
ground(n)
photographer(n)
channel( n)
match(n)
exhibition(n)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Correct by themselves
Present the new structures to ask and
answer about the price of sending a
letter, a postcard or a parcel to
somewhere
2. Structures
Asking
Answering
- I want to send this - Do you want to
letter to Quy Nhon? send it airmail or
surface mail?
- How much is
- I have to weigh the
airmail?
first. Its
.grams/kilograms
Thatll be dong

124

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Ask ss to look at the tables and present
the aim
*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs to make similar
dialogues with the partner
Ask 4 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct answers
* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the extra board with the
advertisement: Whats on this week?
and present the situation: Nam and Na
are talking about what they are going to
do this week. Now listen to the dialogue
and complete the advertisement
Ask ss to answer some questions
- When is the movie The newcomer
on?
- When does the soccer match between
Le Do school and Quang Trung school
start?
- What is there at Nguyen Khuyen school
on 22nd March?
- Where is the photo exhibition?
*While-listening (8)
Play the tape ( 3 times)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct answers

* Post-listening (2)
Ask ss to answer: Where are Nam and
Na going to go this week?
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
Observe and listen
Pairwork
Observe, listen and remark
Observe and listen carefully
Listen carefully

Pairwork

Listen carefully and choose the phrase


Share and compare with their partner
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
3. Listen
* Key:
1) The newcomer
2) Town Ground
3) English Speaking Contest
4) Culture House
Listen and answer
They are going to the Town Groundto watch
the soccer match
Listen and answer

125

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make questions and answers about part Speak
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 23/11/2011

Period 43

Date of teaching:
8A : 26/11/2011
8B : 25/11/2011
8C : 26/11/2011

UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD
Lesson 3 : Read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text
about opening a new shopping mall
- Standard: Read and tick the True or False sentences (exercise 1) and answer the
questions (exercise 2)
- Higher : Write a summary of the text
+ Vocabulary: mall (n); different (a); roof (n) ; notice (v); owner (n); business (n);
selection (n); concerned (a) ; resident (n); offer(v); goods(n) = product(n).
+ Structures: Present perfect, future simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and check the sentences (exercise 1) and
answer the questions (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty and kindness
II. Preparations
126

1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review past verbs and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up( 3)
Ask 2: What will you do next week?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5) Game: Find
something
Ask 3 groups to play
Remark the results and present the new
lesson
* Pre-reading (12)
Present some new words

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the past verbs in the tale
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently and check
the sentences
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Finding something that can match to the
word store. Eg: bookstore

1. New words
mall (n)
different (a)
roof (n)
notice (v)
owner (n)
business (n)
selection (n)
concerned (a)
resident (n)
offer(v)
goods(n) = product(n).
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen and remember again
Read the tale silently
Use the information in the tale to check
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. Check the sentences
Answers:
127

a) F: seven days
b) F: 50
c) F: not pleased
d) T
e) T
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer Pairwork
the questions, notice ss about the
questions with was and did
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Observe and correct
Remark and give out the answer key
Correct by themselves
3. Answer
a) All the shops are under one roof
b) There are 50 air-conditioned specialty stores,
4 movie theaters, 10 restaurants and a
childrens play area
c) They think the mall will take their business
d) The stores in the mall will offer a wider
selection of products, some kinds of goods are at
cheaper prices
* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to summarize the text

Listen and check

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write 10 sentences about the tale
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

128

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 27/11/2011

Period 44

Date of teaching:
8A : 29/11/2011
8B : 29/11/2011
8C : 29/11/2011

UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD
Lesson 4 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a class notice using a
pasage and the model notice
- Standard: write a class notice using a pasage and the model story
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the notice
+ Vocabulary: discuss (v); effect(n); hardware store(n); contact(v); holdv) =
organize(v); ; celebrate(v); hall(n); notice(n); contest(n) = competition(n)
+ Structures: Format of a notice
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using a pasage and the model notice
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the notice
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love outdoor activities
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the text on page 67 and ask:
What do the residents and the small store owners think about the new mall?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Pelmanism

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Pelmanism:
1

new

open

listen

ask
129

5
answer

old

speak

8
close

*Key :
1- 6 ; 2- 8 ; 3- 7 ; 4- 5
Remark the game and ask
Today we are going to write a story How
the tiger got his stripes
*Pre- writing(10)
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the model notice and ask
Who holds the meeting?
When will they hold the meeting?
What time will they hold the meeting?
Where will they hold the meeting?
Who will they contact?
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct
Present the format of a class notice

Observe and listen

1. New words
discuss (v)
effect(n)
hardware store(n)
contact(v)
holdv) = organize(v)
celebrate(v); hall(n)
notice(n)
contest(n) = competition(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Show out the answers

Observe and listen


2. Format of a notice
Organizer
Topic of the notice
Date/Time
Place
Please contact

Ask ss to read the passage and underline


the parts or phrase to write the notice

In capital letters

Read and underline

130

*While-writing(17)
Ask ss to to write their notice about the
contest
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

The others write on the drafting paper

Listen and copy


*Suggested writing:
The School English Speaking Club
HOLDING A SPEAKING CONTEST
TO CELEBRATE THE TEACHERS DAY
Date: November 15
Time: from 7.30 pm to 10.00 pm
Place: At Hall 204, Building G
Please contact Tran Thi Thu Hang of class
8H

* Post-writing (5)
Hang the extra board and ask ss to use it to
write another notice
The School Sports Club is going to hold a
walking competition to celebrate the May
Day. The competition will be at the School
Ground from 7.30 am to 10.30 am on May
1st . The person to contact is Mr. Nam of
Write on the drafting paper
class 9A.
Listen and answer
Ask ss to write the notice
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
Ask ss to read their notice
Remark and give out the answers

*Suggested writing:
The School Sports Club
HOLDING A WALKING COMPETITION
TO CELEBRATE THE MAY DAY
Date: May 1st
Time: from 7.30 am to 10.30 am
Place: At the School Ground
Please contact Mr. Nam of class 9A
Listen and answer
131

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the story again in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 28/11/2011

Period 45

Date of teaching:
8A : 02/12/2011
8B : 30/11/2011
8C : 02/12/2011

UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBORHOOD
Lesson 5 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Present perfect with since and for
- Comparision with: like, (not) asas, (not) the same as, different
from
- Standard: Write the past participle form of the regular and irregular verbs
Complete the expressions using since or for
Complete the sentences using the form of the verbs in present perfect tense
Complete the conversations using the verb in the box
Complete the sentences using the form of the adjectives in the box
- Higher : Ask and answer some morre questions
+ Vocabulary: attend(v); company(n); through(prep); pocket-watch(n); wristwatch(n)
+ Structures: Past participle form of the irregular verbs
132

Comparision with: like, (not) asas, (not) the same as, different
from
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(6)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Remark the game and present the new


lesson

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Matching: ( Exercise 1)
be been
go gone
eat eaten
live lived
attend attended
see seen
do done
write written
work worked
collect collected
Observe and listen

* Since and For(20)- Exercise 2,3,4


Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the use of since and for
Listen and tell

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


explain the aim
Ask ss to use since or for to complete the
expressions

*Key :
since a point of time since June
for
a period of time for two months
Observe and listen
Individualwork
133

Ask some ss to give out their answers


Remark and correct

Listen and correct


Listen and copy
1. Exercise 2
* Answers:

Ask ss to give the form of present perfect

1) for
2) since
3) since
4) since
5) for
6) for
7) since
8) for
Observe, listen and tell
S+ have/has + VPII + since /for +

Ask ss to do exercise 3
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

S+ have/has + not + VPII + since /for +


Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
2. Exercise 3
* Answers:
1) have lived
2) have not eaten
3) have not seen
4) have attened
5) has worked
6) has collected

Ask ss to do exercise 4
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
3. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
1) have been
2) hope
3) have lived
4) Is
5) want
134

6) looks
7) have been
8) saw
*Comparision (10) -( Exercise 5)
Ask ss to look at the table, the pictures and
present the aim
Present the types of comparision: like,
(not) asas, (not) the same as,
different from
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (5)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Observe and listen


Observe and listen

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
Listen and copy
4. Exercise 5.
* Keys:
1) as not large as
2) different from
3) not as cheap as
4) like
5) as expensive as
6) the same as
7) as long as
8) not as modern as
9) not as cheap as
Listen and answer

3. Homework(3)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period: Unit 8: Getting started + Listen and read
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

135

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 30/11/2011

Period 46

Date of teaching:
8A : 03/12/2011
8B : 02/12/2011
8C : 03/12/2011

UNIT 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Talk about the differences between two places
- Talk about the events and changes in the future
- Listen to a dialogue to fill in the missing words
- Read the text, complete the summary and find out the synonym words
- Write a letter to tell friends about their house using word cues and the
questions
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to
know about Hoa and Nas opinions of the country life and city life
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and answer the questions
- Higher: Talk about their ideas for the country life and city life
+ Vocabulary: relative(n) ; entertainment(n); facility (n); prefer(v) ; province(n);
accessible(a); definitely(adv) ; simple(a); clean (a); peaceful (a); remote(a);
permanently(adv)
+ Structures : - Present perfect tense
- Present progressive tense to talk about the changes
- Comparative and superlative adjectives
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to look up to their grandparents and parents
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
136

1. The old lesson check-up(1)


Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5): Networks game
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage

Places
in the
country

Remark the game


Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the picture and set the scene: you are
going to listen to Na and Hoas
conversation, they are talking about the
differences between the city life and the
country life
Give ss the new words

Places
in the
city

Observe and listen carefully


Observe and listen

1. New words
relative(n)
entertainment(n)
facility (n)
prefer(v)
province(n)
accessible(a)
definitely(adv)
simple(a)
clean (a)
peaceful (a)
remote(a)
permanently(adv)

137

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Present some new structures in the


dialogue

2. Structures
- Present perfect tense(review)
- Present progressive tense to talk about the
changes
Eg: The countryside is getting more
modern

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions using the information from
the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves

*Production( 5)
Ask ss some questions
What do you think about the country life?
What do you think about the city life?

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Pairwork

Observe and rermark


3. Answer the questions
* Answers:
a) She has been to the countryside.
b) She was there for one day
c) It is too quiet and there is nothing to do
d) She means there is nowhere to go to
e) Many remotr areas are getting electricity
and people can now have things like
refrigerator, TV and so on

Listen and answer

138

Do you prefer the city or the countryside?


* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write s list of the things about the city and the countryside
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson: Review the first term
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 04/12/2011

Period 47

Date of teaching:
8A : 06/12/2011
8B : 06/12/2011
8C : 06/12/2011

REVIEW THE FIRST TERM

I. The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims
By the end of the lesson ss will have a good chance to review:
- The past simple tense and present perfect tense
- The present simple to talk about future actions
Remember the grammar points well and do some exercises
+ Vocabulary: personal information, school and home vocabulary
+ Structures : past simple tense, present perfect tense and present simple to talk about
future actions.
2. Skills: Writing, and speakingskills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard.
139

II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (4)
Ask ss to play game Pelmanism
using the verbs in the past forms

Students activities
Two teams play on the stage
1
make

2
grow

3
build

4
sell

5
buy

6
built

7
sold

8
grown

9
made

10
bought

* Key: 19 ; 2 8 ; 36 ; 4 7; 5 10
Remark the game and present the
new lesson
* Practice (35)
Ask ss to retell the use, the forms of
past simple and present perfect

Listen
Listen and retell
1. Present perfect and past simple
a) Use
- to talk about the actions which happened and
finished in the past
- to talk about the actions which happened in the
past and continued to the present or the future
b) Forms:
Past simple

Present perfect

Khang
dinh

S + V(PI) +

Phu
dinh

S+ didnt + V(infi) + S + have/has +


V(PII)

S + have/has +
V(PII)

140

Nghi
van

Ask ss to make 3 examples on the


board
Ask ss to remember the use, the
forms by underlines the words or
phrases in the sentences
Notice ss about the irregular verbs

Ask ss to do some exercises

Ask ss to do the board


Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and correct

Ask ss to retell the use, the forms of


present simple
Ask ss to make 3 examples on the
board
Ask ss to remember the use, the
forms by underlines the words or

Did + S + v(infi) + ?

Have/Has + S +
V(PII)?

Three ss go to the black board to write


Listen and remember
c) Examples:
a. I lived in HCM city last year
I have lived in HCM city since last year
b. She was there three weeks ago
She has been there for three weeks
* Exercise: Put the verbs in brackets in the
correct forms to complete the sentences
1.Lan(do) ..her homework yesterday
2.They(learn) .French for 3 years
3. We( not eat) chicken this morning
4. Ha (not have ) dinner at home last
week
5.You(play) .soccer for one hour?
6. They(practice)the guitar since three
oclock?
Observe and check
Remark and correct
* Keys:
1. did
2. have learned/leanrt
3. didnt eat
4. didnt have
5 .have played?
6. have practiced?
Listen and tell
2. Present simple
To talk about the plans in the future
Eg:
- They collect garbage at 8 in the morning on
March 6th
- They collect garbage at Dong Xuan market
141

phrases in the sentences

- They finish their work at 4 pm

Ask ss to practice in pairs

Work in pairs

Ask some pairs to practice

Listen and remark

* Production (3)
Ask ss to play the game Making
sentences: One asks, the other one
answers
Ask 2 groups to practice
Remark and correct
* Feed-back (2)
How many grammartical contents
do we review today? What are
they?

Listen and answer

Listen and answer

3. Homework(1)
- Review the grammar points again
- Learn the vocabulary by heart
- Prepare for the next lesson : Review(cont)
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 05/12/2011

Period 48

Date of teaching:
8A : 09/12/2011
8B : 07/12/2011
8C : 09/12/2011

REVIEW THE FIRST TERM (CONT)

I. The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
142

+ The aims:
By the end of the lesson ss will have a good chance to review:
- Be (not) + adj + enough + to do sth
- Used to
- Modals: can, could, may
- V(ing) after some verbs
Remember the grammar points well and do some exercises
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary from Unit 1 to Unit 7
+ Structures : - Be (not) + adj + enough + to do sth
- Used to
- Modals: can, could, may
- V(ing) after some verbs
- Comparision
2. Skills: Writing, and speakingskills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard.
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (4)
Ask ss to play game Pelmanism
using the antonyms

Students activities
Two teams play on the stage
1
same
6
hate

2
love

3
always

7
8
different answer

4
ask
9
did

5
do
10
never

* Key: 17 ; 2 6 ; 310 ; 4 8; 5 9
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
* Practice (35)
Ask ss to retell the use, the forms of
enough

Listen
Listen and retell
1. enough

143

Be (not) + adj + enough + to do sth


Ask ss to make 3 examples on the board
Ask ss to remember the forms by
underlines the words or phrases in the
sentences

Three ss go to the black board to write


Listen and remember

Ask ss to retell the use, the forms of


used to
Ask ss to make 3 examples on the board
Ask ss to remember the forms by
underlines the words or phrases in the
sentences

Listen and retell

Ask ss to retell the use, the forms of


modals: can, could, may

Listen and retell

Ask ss to make 2 examples on the board


Ask ss to remember the forms by
underlines the words or phrases in the
sentences

* Examples:
- I am not old enough to be in her class
- She is strong enough to carry the box
- They are not tall enough to reach the picture

Three ss go to the black board to write


Listen and remember
2. Used to
a) Use
- to talk about the habits in the past and they
dont exist at the present
b) Forms
+ S + used to + V(infi)I...
- S + did not + use to + V(infi)I...
? Did + S + use to + V(infi)I...?
c) Examples:
- I used to play chess with my brother last year
- Did you use to play chess with your brother
last year?
I didnt use to play chess with my brother last
year

Three ss go to the black board to write


3. Modals:
a) Use
- to give out or respond to favors or assistance
b) Forms
Can/ Could you + V(infi)?
May I help you?
c) Examples:
- Can you carry my bag?
- Could you do me a favor?
- May I help you?
144

Ask ss to do some exercises on the


board

Work in pairs
* Eg:
S1 : Can you .?
S2 : Yes, of course
..

* Production (3)
Listen and read their sentences
Ask ss to make their own examples
about can, could, may
* Feed-back (2)
Listen and answer
How many grammartical contents do we
review today?
What are they?
3. Homework(1)
- Review the grammar points again
- Learn the vocabulary by heart
- Prepare for the next lesson : Review(cont)
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 07/12/2011

Period 49

Date of teaching:
8A : 10/12/2011
8B : 09/12/2011
8C : 10/12/2011

REVIEW THE FIRST TERM (CONT)

I. The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims
145

By the end of the lesson ss will have a good chance to review:


- Reported commands, requests and advice
- Prepositions of time
- Comparision
Remember the grammar points well and do some exercises
+ Vocabulary: personal information and clothing vocabulary
+ Structures : - Reported commands, requests and advice
- Prepositions of time
- Comparision
2. Skills: Writing, and speakingskills
3. Educate ss to learn hard.
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (4)
Ask ss to play game Pelmanism
using the antonyms

Students activities
Two teams play on the stage
1
ask

5
in front of

2
tell

3
behind

6
asked

4
to the right of

7
to the left of

8
told

* Key: 16 ; 2 8 ; 35 ; 4 7
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
* Practice (35)
Ask ss to retell the prepositions of time
they have learnt

Listen and retell


1. Prepositions
a) Use
- used before the nouns of time
b) Kinds

146

Ask ss to make 6 examples on the


board
Ask ss to remember the forms by
underlines the words or phrases in the
sentences
Ask ss to retell the forms of
commands, requests and advice in
reported speech

on

Monday/ May 1st

in

January/ the summer

at

4 oclock

after

3 oclock

before

3 oclock

betwwen and

3 oclock and 4 oclock

Three ss go to the black board to write


Listen and remember
Listen and retell
2. Reported speech
a) Forms
S + asked/told + me(not) to + V +
S1 + said + S2 + should + V +
Three ss go to the black board to write

Ask ss to make 3 examples on the


board
Ask ss to remember the forms by
underlines the words or phrases in the
sentences

Ask ss to do some exercises

Listen and remember


b) Examples:
1. Please give Nam this book
She told me to give you this book
2. Dont get up late
She asked me not to get up late
3. Nam should work harder on his Chinese
pronunciation
She said you should work harder on your
Chinese
Do on the drafting paper
3. Exercise: Complete the sentences
1. Minh should learn the new words by heart
2. Please give Nam this dictionary
3. Dont go out at night
4. Do your homework everyday
Work in pairs
147

Ask ss to retell kinds and the forms of


comparision
Ask ss to make 7 examples on the
board
Ask ss to remember the forms by
underlines the words or phrases in the
sentences

Eg:
- She is as tall as her mother
- She is not as tall as her mother
- She is taller than her mother
- She is the tallest in her family
- She is different from her mother
- She is the same as her mother
- She is not the same as her mother
Listen and read their sentences
Listen and answer

* Production (3)
Ask ss to make their own examples
about comparision
* Feed-back (2)
How many grammartical contents do
we review today? What are they?
3. Homework(1)
- Review the grammar again
- Review the vocabulary from Unit 1 to Unit 7
- Prepare for the next lesson : The first term test
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

Date of preparing: 09/12/2011

Date of teaching:
8A : 12/12/2011
8B : 12/12/2011
8C : 12/12/2011
148

THE FIRST SEMESTER TEST

Period 50

Time: 45 minutes
I.The aims of the lesson
1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, the teacher will check ss vocabulary, grammar
and knowledges from unit 1 to unit 7
+ Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 1 to unit 7
+ Structures:
- Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning
- used to
- Prepositions of time
- Modals: should, can could, may
- Adverbs of manner
- Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
- Gerunds
2. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
II. Matrix
Tn
Ch

Nhn bit
TNKQ

Reading

TL

TNKQ

Vn dng
TL

TNKQ

Cng

TL

(Multiple
choice)
6 cu x 0,25
= 1,5

Vocabulary

Grammar

Thng hiu

6 cu
1,5=
15%

(Multiple
choice)
8 cu x 0.25
= 2,0

(Verb
division)
4 cu x 0.5
= 2,0

(Tick True/
False )
8 cu x
0,25=2,0

(Answer
)
4 cu x
0,25=1,0

12cu
4,0 =
40%

12 cu
3,0 =
30%

149

Writing

S cu
S im

(Rearrange
the words )
6 cu x 0,25 =
1,5

14 cu
3,5 im
= 35%

6cu
1,5 =
15%

6 cu
1,5
= 15%

8 cu
2,0 im
=20%

4 cu
1,0 im
= 10%

4 cu
2,0 im
= 20%

36 cu
100%

I. Khoanh trn vo t ng hon thnh cc cu sau (1,5points)


1. I like drawing, outdoor activities and acting. Those are my
a. favors
b. pastimes
c. habits
d. hobbies
2. I received my English2 days agoIt was excellent
a. report card
b. dictionary
c. letter
d.application form
3. We collect used paper, glass, cans.. and send them for
a. cycling
b. reducing
c. recycling
d. reusing
4. Tims English pronunciation is bad. He needs it
a. to improve
b. improvement
c. improving
d. improve
5. I want to..this parcel to Nha Trang
a. get
b. bring
c. send
d. take
6. The tiger still has black .from the burns today
a. wisdom
b. stripes
c.burns
d. straw
II. Khoanh trn vo t hoc cm t ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2 points)
1. She is ..to carry the box
a. strong enough
b. enough strong
c. strong
d. enough
2. The sun in the West
a. set
b. sets
c. to set
d. setting
3. Nam did his homework
a. herself
b. myself
c. himself
d. themselves
4. Nga has lived in Ha Noi 5 years
a. in
b. since
c. for
d. on
5. They have been here . last week
a. on
b. since
c. for
d. in
6. I ..in the countryside 5 years ago
a. used to live
b. use to live
c. use to lived
d. used live
7. Please give Nam this book. She .give you this book
a. asked me
b. ask me to
c. asked to
d. asked me to
8. He likes TV very much
a. watch
b. watching
c. watches
d. watched
III. Chia ng t trong ngoc n dng ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2points)
1. Can you (help) .......................................................................me?
2. Minh (live) ...................................................................................................................in Son La for 3 years
150

3. I must (do) ..the chores after school


4. They (eat)...chicken yesterday
IV. c on hi thoi sau:
Hung: Hi, my names Hung
Lien: Hello. Nice to meet you, Hung. Im Lien
Hung: Are you new around here?
Lien: Yes. Ive been here since yesterday.
Hung: Im sure youll love this place
Lien: I hope so. How long have you lived here?
Hung: Oh, Ive lived here for 12 years
Lien: Is there a movie theater near here?
Hung: There is one just around the corner
Lien: Do you often go there?
Hung: Yes. I go there once a week
Lien: Would you like to go there tonight?
Hung: Yes. Id love to
Lien: Is at 7 oclock OK?
Hung: Yes, lets meet at 7 oclock
Lien: And where can we meet?
Hung: Lets meet in front of the theater. Bye.
Lien: Goodbye, Hung

1) Tch cc cu ng sai (2 points)


T
1. Hung is the new comer
2. Lien has been here since yesterday
3. Hung has lived here for 10 years
4. There is a park around the corner
5. Nam often goes to the movie theater twice a week
6. Lien wants Hung to go to the movie theater with her tonight
7. They are going to meet at six oclock
8. They are going to meet in front of the movie theater
2. Tr li cc cu hi sau(1 point)
1. Who is the new comer?
...

2. How long has Hung lived here?


.

3. Are they going to go to the movie theater tonight?


...

4. Where are they going to meet?


.

V. Sp xp cc t sau theo ng trt t to thnh cu c ngha (1,5 points)


1. is / this / Nams bedroom.
.

2. is / a / there / desk / the room / on the left of.


.

3. a / near / there / the / bed / is / desk.


151

4. there / window /a / on the right of / is / the room.


.

5. is / wardrobe/ there/ a / the window/ next to.


.

6. wardrobe/ opposite / the desk / the / is.


.

III. P N V BIU IM
I. 6 x 0,25= 1,5 points.
1. d
2. a
3. c
4. a
5. c
6. b
II. 8x 0,25 = 2 points
1. a
2. b
3. c
4. c
5. b
6. a
7. d
8. b
III. 4x 0,5= 2 points
1. help ; 2. has lived ; 3. do ; 4. ate
IV. Cu 1: 8 x 0,25 = 2 points
1. F
2. T
3. F
4. F
5. F
6. T
7. F
8. T
Cu 2: 4 x 0,25 = 1 points
1. Lien is the new comer
2. Hung has lived here for 12 years
3. Yes, they are
4. They are going to meet in front of the movie theater
V. 6x 0,25= 1,5points
1. This is Nams bedroom
152

2. There is a desk on the left of the room


3. There is a bed near the desk
4. There is a window on the right of the room (On the right of the room, there is a
window)
5. There is a wardrobe next to the window
6. The wardrobe is opposite the desk
Date of preparing: 04/12/2011

Period 51

Date of teaching:
8A : 13/12/2011
8B : 13/12/2011
8C : 15/12/2011

UNIT 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE


Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Ask and answer the questions about the changes of the countryside
- Listen to a conversation on the phone and fill in the missing words
- Standard : Ask and answer the questions about the changes of the countryside
Listen to a conversation on the phone and fill in the missing words
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the changes of their countryside
+ Vocabulary: busy(a); dirty(a); offer(v); get(v) = become(v).
+ Structures: Present progressive and comparative adjectives
2. Skills:
+ Speaking: Ask and answer the questions about the changes of the countryside
+ Listening: Listen to the conversation and fill in the missing words
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love their motherland
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Pelmanism"
153

Divide the students into two teams and


ask them to play

Two groups play on the stage


* Pelmanism:
1

quiet

dirty

modern

fresh

clean

polluted

noisy

traditional

*Key :
1- 7 ; 2- 5 ; 3- 8 ; 4- 6
*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the aim through the table
Ask ss to look at the models and the
suggested answers in the table

Listen carefully
1. New words
busy(a)
dirty(a)
offer(v)
get(v) = become(v).

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Listen and check
Remark and correct the mistake
Correct by themselves
Present the new structures to talk about
2. Structures
the changes
S + is / are + getting / becoming+

adj(er) +
more + adj

There are more + adj + N(s) +

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs to make sentences
using the two pictures
Ask 6 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct answers

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Pairwork
Observe, listen and remark
* Key:
154

- The traffic is getting busier


- The town is becoming more beautiful
- The streets are becoming larger/
noisier/cleaner
- There are more tall buildings and houses
- There are more green trees
* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the extra board and present the
Observe and listen carefully
situation: Aunt Hang is calling Lan fro
Hue to announce her that she and Uncle
Chi are going to visit her family next
week. Now listen to the phone
conversation and complete it by filling in
the missing words
*While-listening (8)
Listen carefully
Play the tape ( 3 times)
Share and compare
Ask ss to give out their answers
Observe and correct
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct answers 3. Listen
* Key:
1) that
2) this
3) Its
4) Where
5) from
6) coming
7) week
8) arriving
9) Thursday
10) late
11) afternoon
12) speak
13) my
14) get
* Post-listening (2)
Ask ss to make five sentences about the
changes of their countryside

Show out their ideas

* Feed-back (1)

Listen and answer


155

What is the main content of the lesson?


3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make questions and answers about part Speak
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 12/12/2011

Period 52

Date of teaching:
8A : 16/12/2011
8B : 14/12/2011
8C : 16/12/2011

UNIT 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE


Lesson 3 : Read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the tale
The lost shoe
- Standard: Read and complete the sentences (exercise 1) and answer the questions
(exercise 2)
- Higher : Write a summary of the tale
+ Vocabulary: Little Pea (n); Stout Nut (n); die (v) ; marry (v); cruel (a); upset (a);
festival (n); harvest (n) ; prince (n); fairy(n); rag(n); drop(v); loose(v); own(v).
+ Structures: Past simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and complete the sentences (exercise 1) and
answer the questions (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty and kindness
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
156

2. Students: review past verbs and vocabulary


III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2: What did you do last week?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5) Game: Networks
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks : Family members
mom
Family
members

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
How may characteristics are there in
The lost shoe?
Present some new words

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the past verbs in the tale
* While-reading(17)

dad

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)


1. New words
Little Pea (n)
Stout Nut (n)
die (v)
marry (v
cruel (a)
upset (a)
festival (n)
harvest (n)
prince (n)
fairy(n)
rag(n)
drop(v)
loose(v)
own(v).
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen and remember again

157

Ask ss to read the text silently and check


the sentences
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Read the tale silently


Use the information in the tale to check
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. Complete the sentences
Answers:
a) farmer
b) died
c) used, again
d) marry/choose
e) new clothes
f) lost

Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer Pairwork


the questions, notice ss about the
questions with was and did
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Observe and correct
Remark and give out the answer key
Correct by themselves
3. Answer
a) She was a poor farmers daughter
b) She made Little Pea do the chores all day
c) Before the festival started, a fairy appeared
and magically changed her rags into beautiful
clothes
d) The prince decided to marry the girl who
owned the lost shoe/ fitted the lost shoe
e) Ss answers
* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to summarize the tale
Listen and check
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write 10 sentences about the tale
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
158

+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 14/12/2011

Period 53

Date of teaching:
8A : 17/12/2011
8B : 16/12/2011
8C : 17/12/2011

UNIT 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE


Lesson 5 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a story using word cues
and the model story
- Standard: write a story using word cues and the model story
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the story
+ Vocabulary: graze (v); appear(v); leave(v); say(v); tie(v); ; light(v); escape(v);
servant(n); master(n); wisdom(n); return(v); straw(n); bring(v); stripe(n)
+ Structures: Structure of describing the position
On the other side
In the right corner
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model story
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the story
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love reading folktales
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 40 and ask: What did people use to do in the
past?
159

2. The new lesson


Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Pelmanism

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Pelmanism:
1

be

go

light

ask

went

asked

was/were

lit

*Key :
1- 7 ; 2- 5 ; 3- 8 ; 4- 6
Remark the game and ask
Today we are going to write a story How
the tiger got his stripes
*Pre- writing(10)
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the story and complete it
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Observe and listen

1. New words
graze (v)
appear(v)
leave(v)
say(v)
tie(v)
light(v)
escape(v)
servant(n)
master(n)
wisdom(n)
return(v)
straw(n)
bring(v)
stripe(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Show out the answers
2. Answers
1. appeared
160

2. was
3. said
4. left
5. went
6. tied
7. brought
8. burned
9. escaped

*While-writing(17)
Ask ss to imagine they are the farmer to
write their story
Guide ss to change the subjects , the
objects and the possesive adjectives from
the third person into the first preson
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen


a farmer, the small man I
his my
him me

* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss about the story
Remark and give out the answers

Listen and answer


Observe and correct
Correct by themselves

The others write on the drafting paper

Listen and copy


*Suggested writing:
One day, as I was in my field and my buffalo
was grazing nearby, a tiger appeared. The
tiger wanted to know why the strong buffalo
was the servant and I was the master. I said
I had something called wisdom but I left it
home that day. I went to get the wisdom, but
before that I tied the tiger to a tree with a
rope because I didnt want it to eat the
buffalo. When I returned, I brought some
straw with me. I said it was my wisdom. I lit
the straw and the fire burned the tiger. The
tiger escaped, but it still has black stripes
from the burns today

161

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the story again in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 17/12/2011

Period 54

Date of teaching:
8A : 20/12/2011
8B : 20/12/2011
8C : 20/12/2011

UNIT 8 : COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE


Lesson 6 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Past simple
- Prepositions of time: on, in, at, after, before, between
- Used to
- Standard: Write the past form of the irregular verbs
Make questions for the answers
Complete the sentences using the prepositions of time
Complete the dialogue using the verb used to
- Higher : Ask and answer some morre questions
+ Vocabulary: news(n)
162

+ Structures: Prepositions of time: on, in, at, after, before, between


Past form of the irregular verbs
Used to
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(6)
Ask ss to play the game Jumbled words

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
* Past simple(15)- Exercise 1+2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the form of the verbs on
the extra board

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Jumbled words:
unr run
ehav have
edri ride
tae eat
eakt take
Observe and listen

Listen and tell


*Key :
run
fly
take
go
have
do
be
ride

ran
flew
took
went
had
did
was/were
rode
163

eat
ate
sit
sat
come
came
Observe and listen

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


explain the aim
Pairwork
Ask ss to use the answers in part 2 to make
questions
Listen and correct
Ask some pairs to practice their sentences
Remark and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 2
* Answers:

1) Did you eat rice this morning?


2) I got to school by bus
3) Where were you last night?
4) I had Math, English and Music
*Prepositions of time (10) -( Exercise 3)
Ask ss to look at the table and present the
aim
Ask ss to tell the use of the prepositions of
time: on, in , at, between, after, before
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Used to (5) -( Exercise 4)


Ask ss to look at the pictures and present
the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to

Observe and listen


Listen and tell
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct

2. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
a) on
b) in
c) between
d)at, after
e) before
Observe and listen
Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
164

Ask ss to write on the board


Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (5)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and correct


Listen and copy
3. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
1) used to have
2) used to be
3) used to live
Listen and answer

3. Homework(3)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period:
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

THE SECOND SEMESTER


165

Date of preparing: 22/12/2011

Period 55

Date of teaching:
8A : 24/12/2011
8B : 27/12/2011
8C : 24/12/2011

UNIT 9 : THE FIRST-AID COURSE


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

I. The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Make and respond to requests, offers and promises
- Listen to a passage to arrange the right pictures
- Read passages to know the first aid when people are in cases of fainting,
shock and burns
- Write a thank-you note
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue
between Lan and a nurse of Bach Mai hospital on the phone for general or detailed
information
- Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to select the topic covered in the
dialogue
- Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue
+ Vocabulary: emergency(n) ; ambulance(n); wound (n); concious(a) ; bleed(v); fall
(v); hit(v) ; asleep(a); awake (a)
+ Structures : - Will to make requests, offers and promises
- In order to, so as to,
- Future simple
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and know how to do in the situations which
require first aid.
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson

Teachers activities

Students activities

166

*Warm-up(5) Matching game :


Ask ss to play the game Matching game
Use the pictures and the words on the
board

Two groups play on the stage


* Answers:
a
b
c
d
e
f

bandage
stretcher
wheelchair
ice
alcohol
ambulance

Observe and listen carefully


Remark the game
Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene: you are
going to listen to Lan and the nurse from
Bach Mai hospital on the phone, a student
fell off her bike and hit her head on the
road. Her head had a bad cut. so Lan
called the for an ambulance
Give ss the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present the new structures in the dialogue

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in

Observe and listen

1. New words
emergency(n)
ambulance(n)
wound (n)
concious(a)
bleed(v)
fall (v)
hit(v)
asleep(a)
awake (a)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
Will: to make requests, offers and
promises
Eg:
Will you hurry, please?
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
Discuss in pairs
167

chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Ask ss to guess what first aid instructions
the nurse will give to Lan?
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to choose the topic
covered in the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key
*Production( 5)
Ask ss some questions
1. How was the victim?
2.What did the nurse instruct Lan to do to
stop the bleeding?

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen

Observe and rermark

3. Answer
e) giving first aid instructions
Listen and answer
* Key:
1. She was concious
2. She asked Lan to use a towel or a
handkerchief to cover the wound, then put
pressure on it and hold it tight
Listen and answer

* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write an instruction for a bad cut first aid
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

168

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 25/12/2011
Date of teaching:
8A : 27/12/2011
8B : 28/12/2011
8C : 27/12/2011
Period 56

UNIT 9 : THE FIRST-AID COURSE


Lesson 2 : Speak

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
a. The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make and respond to requests,
offers and promises
- Standard: make and respond to requests, offers and promises in the situations in the
pictures
- Higher: make and respond to requests, offers and promises in some other situations
b. Vocabulary: promise(v); promis(n) ; bandage(n); medicine(n); forget(v).
c. Structures : - Will/ Can/ Could/ Would to make requests, offers and promises
2. Skills: speaking skills: make and respond to requests, offers and promises
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be helpful
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Two groups play on the stage
Divide the class into 2 teams and ask them
to play on the stage
* Networks
can

Modal
s

could
Modal
s
169

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- speaking(10)
Present the new words

1. New words
promise(v)
promis(n)
bandage(n)
medicine(n)
forget(v
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
Present the structures to make and respond 2. Structures
to requests, offers and promises
Requests
Offers
Promises
- Can/ Could - Would you - I will .I
you?
like ?
promise
- Will?
- What can I - I promise
Would
get for you? Ill
you?
- Shall I ? - I promise I
- Will/Wont wont
you have
- I promise
?
to(not)
- Can I get
you ?
Responses
- Sure
- Yes, please
- Ok
- That would
- All right
be nice
- Im sorry, I - No, thank
cant
you
- Im afraid
not

- I hope so
- Good
- Im glad
- Dont
forget

Eg:
1) - Can you give me a bandage, please?
- Sure. Here you are
170

2) - Can I get you some bandage?


- Yes, please
3) - I promise I wont go out at night again
- Good
Pairwork

Hang the pictures and ask ss to practice in


exchange pairs to make and respond to
requests, offers and promises
*While-speaking(17)
Go around the classroom to help ss
practice
Listen carefully and check
Ask students to practice in pairs before the Correct by themselves
class
Observe and listen carefully
Remark and correct the mispronunciation
* Answers:
b) - Can I get you some wate/ medicine?
- That would be nice
c) - Can I get you some bandage?
- Yes, please
Or - Can you give me some bandage,
please?
- Sure. Here you are
d) - Could I get you some wate/ medicine?
- That would be nice
e) - I promise I wont play soccer in the
house again
- Good
* Post- speaking (10)
Observe and listen carefully
Now ask ss to look at the pictures on the
board and give more requests, offers or
promises.
Pairwork
Ask ss to pairwork
Ask some pairs to practice
Listen carefully and check
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers
Observe and correct
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3.Homework(1)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the sentences in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Listen
171

4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy


+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

Date of preparing: 28/12/2011

Period 57

Date of teaching:
8A : 30/12/2011
8B : 30/12/2011
8C : 30/12/2011

UNIT 9 : THE FIRST-AID COURSE


Lesson 3 : Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to a text decribing an
emergency room in a large hospital and write the order of appearing of the pictures
- Standard: Listen to the text and write the order of appearing of the pictures
- Higher: answer some questions about the text
+ Vocabulary: paramedic(n); wheel(v); patient(n) ; push(v); wheelchair(n); eye
chart(n); eyesight(n); scale(n); crutch(n).
+ Structures: The present progressive tense
2. Skills:
+ Listening: Listen to the conversation and arrange the pictures
+ Speaking: Ask and answer the questions
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay healthy, eat sensibly
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask: What is/ he/she doing?
172

are they doing?


2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Guessing game

Students activities
The whole class play together
* Guessing game
A- - - - - - - N---D----* Key
Ambulance
Nurse
Doctor

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- listening(10)
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to retell the structures of commands
Hang the pisture and present the situation:
You are going to listen to a text decribing
an emergency room in a large hospital and
write the order of appearing of the pictures
Ask ss to work in pairs to guess the right
order of the pictures
Ask ss to give out their ideas
* While- listening (10)
Play the tape (3times)

1. New words
paramedic(n)
wheel(v)
patient(n)
push(v)
wheelchair(n)
eye chart(n)
eyesight(n)
scale(n)
crutch(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
Observe and listen

Pairwork
Listen carefully and check
Listen carefully and write the order
173

Ask ss to give out their answers on the


board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Compare with a partner


Correct by themselves
Observe and listen carefully
* Answers:
FBADEC

* Post- listening (10)


Ask ss to ask and answer
1) What is a paramedic doing?
2) What is a nurse doing?
3) Where is the eye chart?
4) How many letters does the eye chart
have?
5) What is a doctor doing?
Ask ss to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (3)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Pairwork

Listen carefully and check


Correct by themselves
* Answers:
1) She is wheeling a patient on a stretcher
2) She pushing an empty wheelchair
3) Its on the wall
4) It has 28 letters
5) He is trying to weigh a crying baby on
the scale
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the instruction in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Read
4. Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

174

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 29/12/2011

Period 58

Date of teaching:
8A : 31/12/2011
8B : 03/01/2012
8C : 31/12/2011

UNIT 9 : THE FIRST-AID COURSE


Lesson 4 : Read

I. The aims of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand a passage
about how to give first aid to the victims in some cases
- Standard: Read and choose a correct case for each of the treatments
- Higher: Retell the things that they should do in some cases that need first aid
+ Vocabulary: lye (v); flat (a); force (v) ; lock (v); elevate (v); victim (n); revive (v);
overheat (v) ; minimize (v); ease(v); sterile(a).
+ Structures: Commands to give instructions
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and check the choose the treatments
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay safe and know the ways to give first aid
instructions in the home
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review modal verbs and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss to give the instructions of making cucumber salad
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5): Game: Networks
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks : Dangers in the home
fire

hot water

175

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
What do you do to give first aid
instructions in the following cases?

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)

Present some new words

1. New words
lye (v)
flat (a)
force (v)
lock (v)
elevate (v)
victim (n)
revive (v)
overheat (v)
minimize (v)
ease(v)
sterile(a)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the commands to give
instructions
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently and choose
the treaments
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Pairwork and give out their ideas


Fainting
Shock
Burns
-

Listen carefully
Read the text silently
Observe and correct
Correct
Correct by themselves
2. Choose the treaments
Answers:
A)Fainting: a; c ; e
B)Shock: b
C) Burns: d
176

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions
1) What should you do when somenone
is fainting?
2) What should you do when somenone
has shock?
3) What should you do when somenone
is burned?
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Pairwork

Observe and correct


Correct by themselves
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period : Part Write
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 31/12/2011
Date of teaching:
8A : 03/01/2012
8B : 04/01/2012
8C : 03/01/2012
Period 59
UNIT 9 : THE FIRST-AID COURSE
Lesson 5 : Write
I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a description of a room
using word cues and the picture
177

- Standard: write a a description of a room using word cues and the picture
cues
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the position of the things in the picture
+ Vocabulary: corner (n); oven(n); towel rack(n); counter(n); beneath(prep); ; jar(n);
flour(n); lighting fixture(n); above(prep); vase(n); wardrobe(n)
+ Structures: Structure of describing the position
On the other side
In the right corner
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and picture cues
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the objects
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be tidy
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 28 and ask: Where is/are the.?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

The whole class play together


* Networks:
table
cupboard
Things in
the kitchen

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a description
of a room in the house
*Pre- writing(10)
Ask ss to tell the prepositions of position
Give ss some necessary words

Observe and listen


Listen and tell
1. New words
corner (n)
oven(n)
towel rack(n)
178

counter(n)
beneath(prep)
jar(n)
flour(n
lighting fixture(n)
above(prep)
vase(n)
wardrobe(n)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves

Ask ss to read the passage about Hoas


Read silently
beroom
Ask ss some questions
Show out the answers
Where is the desk?
Where are the folders?
Where is the bookshelf?
Where is the bed?
Where is the window?
Where is the wardrobe?
Remark and correct
Ask ss to write a passage to describe Hoas
kitchen
*While-writing(17)
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers
Listen and copy
*Answers:
This is Hoas kitchen
There is a refrigerator in the right corner of
the room. Next to the refrigerator is the
stove and oven. On the other side of the
oven, there is a sink and next to the sink is a
towel rack
The dish rack is on the counter to the right
of the windowand beneath the shelves. On
the counter beneath the window, there are
some jars of sugar, flour and tea. In the
179

* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss about the position of the objects in
Hoas kitchen
Remark and give out the answers

middle of the kitchen, there is a table and


four chairs. The lighting fixture is above the
table and beneath the lighting fixture is a
vase of flowers
Listen and answer
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
Listen and answer
3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write another passage to describe one of your rooms
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 04/01/2012

Period 60

Date of teaching:
8A : 06/01/2012
8B : 06/01/2012
8C : 06/01/2012

UNIT 9 : THE FIRST-AID COURSE


Lesson 6 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Reflexive pronouns
180

- Modals: must, have to, ought to


- Why? Because
- Standard: Complete the dialogue using must or have to
Give advice using ought to
Complete the dialogues using the reflexive pronouns
Ask and answer the questions using Why and Because
- Higher : Ask and answer some morre questions
+ Vocabulary: fail(v); repairman (n); draw(v); tank(n)
+ Structures: Reflexive pronouns, modals
Why? Because
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Networks:
tidy the room

Chores
wash clothes
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
* Modals(12)- Exercise 1+2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the use of must, have to ,
and ought to

Observe and listen

Listen and tell


*Key :
181

S+ must/ ought to+ Vinfi + ...


S+ have / has to + Vinfi + ...
Ask ss to look at the model sentence and
explain the aim
Ask ss to use the pictures in part 1 to
complete the sentences
Ask some pairs to practice their sentences
Remark and correct

Ask ss to work in pairs to give advice to


the people using the pictures and the
sentences
Ask some pairs to practice
Remark and correct

Observe and listen


Pairwork
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) must tidy
2) must dust
3) have to sweep
4) have to clean
5) must empty
6) must feed
Pairwork
Remark and correct
2. Exercise 2.
* Keys:
a: you ought to study harder
b: you ought to get up earlier
c: you ought to eat less/more fruit and
vegetables
d: you ought to go to the dentists

*Reflexive pronouns (10) -( Exercise 3)


Ask ss to look at the dialogues and present
the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen


Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
3. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
182

1) ourselves
2) myself
3) yourself
4) himself
5) herself
6) themselves
7) yourselves
*Why?/ Because (15) -( Exercise 4)
Ask ss to look at the pictures and present
the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Observe and listen


Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
4. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
b) Why did Nam have to cook dinner?
Because his Mom was home late
c) Why was Nams Mom home late?
Because she had to go and visit his
grandmother
d) Why did Ha fail her English exam?
Because played computer games
4) Why didnt Nga go the movies?
Because had to clean the kitchen and
sweep the living room
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar from unit 1 to unit 3 to prepare for revision.
- Prerpare for the next period:
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

183

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 05/01/2012
Date of teaching:
8A : 07/01/2012
8B : 31/01/2012
8C : 07/01/2012
Period 61
UNIT 10 : RECYCLING
Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Give out and respond to the instructions
- Talk about the feelings
- Listen to the tape to choose the right answers to the questions
- Read the a magazine page about how things are recycled in some
countries in the world and answer the questions, then make a list of recyled things
- Write an instruction
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to
know how we can save natural resources and protect the environment
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and answer the sentences
- Higher: Ask and answer questions about recyling at home
+ Vocabulary: mean(v) ; reuse(v); recycle (v); natural resources(n) ; overpackage(v);
instead of(prep)
+ Structures : - Passive forms
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause
2. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
3. Education:Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the
environment
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
3. The new lesson
184

places
in Ha
Noi

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


can
Things you
can recyle

bottles
Remark the game
Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the picture set the scene: you are
going to listen to the talk between Miss.
Blake and the students of Quang Trung
school about how to protect the
environment and save natural resources
Give ss the new words

Observe and listen carefully

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Observe and listen

1. New words
mean(v)
reuse(v)
recycle (v)
natural resources(n)
overpackage(v)
instead of (prep)

185

Present the new structures in the dialogue

2. Structures
- Passive forms
Eg: Reduce means not buying products
which are overpackaged
S + is/are + V(ed)/ VPII +

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the quiestions using the information from
the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

*Production( 5)
Ask ss to play a game: What do you do at
home to reduce the garbage?
* Feed-back(1)

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive
Eg: Its easy to say
Correct by themselves
Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Pairwork

Observe and rermark


3. Answer the questions
* Answers:
a) Reduce means not buying products which
are overpackaged
b) We ccan reuse things like envelopes,
glass, and plastic bottles and old plastic
bags
c) Recyle means not throwing things away
and finding another use for them
d) We can look for information on recyling
things by contacting an organization like
Friends of the Earth
e) Because they are difficult to dissolve
Pairwork
Listen and answer

186

What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write a short passage about recycling
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

187

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 12/01/2012

Period 62

Date of teaching:
8A : 14/01/2012
8B : 01/02/2012
8C : 14/01/2012

UNIT 10 : RECYCLING
Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Give out and reply to the instructions
- Listen to the talk about how to make compost and check the correct
answers
- Standard : Give out and reply to the instructions
Listen to the talk about how to make compost and check the correct
answers
- Higher: Ask some more questions about the talk
+ Vocabulary: compost(n); belong(v); airmail(n); fabric(n); fertilizer(n); fertilize(v);
matter(n); shade( n); heap(n); grain(n).
+ Structures: Put them in
We can make it into
We can recyle them
2. Skills:
+ Speaking: Give out and reply to the instructions
+ Listening: Listen and check the correct answers
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the
environmentII. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson

188

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Take a survey"

Students activities
* Take a survey:
S1: How much is a/an?
S2: Itsdong (They are dong)
a pen

*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the aim through the picture
Ask ss to look at the model dialogue
Present the new words

ten English
books

an icecream

a stamp

an envelop

Observe and listen carefully

1. New words
compost(n)
belong(v)
airmail(n)
fabric(n)
fertilizer(n)
fertilize(v)
matter(n)
shade( n)
heap(n)
grain(n)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Correct by themselves
Present the new structures to ask and
answer about giving the instructions
2. Structures of giving and responding to
instructions
Asking
- Which group do
clothes belong to?
- Is friut vegetable
matter?
- What can we do
with those clothes?
Ask ss to repeat the new structures in
chorus

Answering
- Put them in
- We can make it
into
- We can recyle
them

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
189

Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Ask ss to look at the tables and present
the aim
*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs to make similar
dialogues with the partner
Ask 4 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct answers
* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the extra board with the sentences
and present the situation: How do you
do to make compost?
*While-listening (8)
Play the tape ( 3 times)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct answers
* Post-listening (2)
Ask ss to answer: Should we turn the
compost?
* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Correct by themselves
Observe and listen
Pairwork
Observe, listen and remark
Observe listen carefully and answer

Listen carefully
Listen again and check the sentences
* Answers: a) A ; b) B ; c) A ; d) B
Pairwork and answer
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make questions and answers about part Speak
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 29/01/2012

Date of teaching:
190

8A : 31/01/2012
8B : 03/02/2012
8C : 31/01/2012

UNIT 10 : RECYCLING

Period 63

Lesson 3 : Read
I. The aim of the lesson
1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text
about how things are recyled
- Standard: Read and answer the questions (exercise 1)
- Higher : Complete the sentences (exercise 2)
+ Vocabulary: tire (n); pipe (n); refill (v) ; industry (n); melt (v); deposit (n); dung (n)
+ Structures: Present perfect, future simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and answer the questions (exercise 1) and
complete the sentences (exercise 2)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the
environment
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review passive forms and vocabulary of recycle
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up( 3)
Ask 2: What did you do last week?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5) Game: Hangman
something

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (12)
Present some new words

Students activities
The whole class play together play on the stage
* Its a product made from waste things
Eg: vegetables, fuit

1. New words
tire (n)
pipe (n)
refill (v)
industry (n)
melt (v)
deposit (n)
191

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the past verbs in the tale
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions, notice ss about the
questions with was and did
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

dung (n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves

Read the text silently


Use the information in the tale to check
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves

2. Answer the questions


Answers:
a) They are cleaned and refilled
b) It is broken up and made into new glassware
c) They made a new law on all drink cans by
returning a deposit when the cans are brought
back for recycling
d) They are made from household and garden
waste
e) Ss answers
Ask ss to read the text silently and check
the sentences
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to summarize the text
* Feed-back (1)

Listen and remember again

Pairwork
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
3. Complete the sentences
a) Car tires can be recycled to make pipes and
floor coverings
b) Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled
c) Glass is broken up, melted and made into new
glassaware
d) Drink cans are recyled
e) Household and garden waste are collected to
make compost
Listen and check

192

What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write 5 sentences about the text
- Do exercises in the work book
- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
*Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 31/01/2012
Date of teaching:
8A : 03/02/2012
8B : 07/02/2012
8C : 03/02/2012
Period 64

UNIT 10 : RECYCLING
Lesson 4 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write an instruction using a
model pasage and the given words
- Standard: write an instruction using a model pasage and the given words
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the instruction
+ Vocabulary: soak (v); dry(v); press(v); mixture(n); scatter(v).
+ Structures: Format of an instruction
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using a model pasage
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the instruction
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the
environment
I. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
193

III. The stages of the lesson


1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the text on page 92, 93 and ask:
What do people do with the empty milk bottles?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Odd one out

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Odd one out:
1) First Then Beside Finally
2) Place Put
Leave Take
*Key :
1) Beside
2) Take

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write an instruction
to do something
*Pre- writing(10)
Give ss some necessary words

Observe and listen

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the recycling instruction and
ask them to use the vewrbs in the box to
complete the instruction
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct
Ask ss to retell the format of an instruction
Ask ss to read the instruction again and
underline the words of order

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently an complete it

1. New words
soak (v)
dry(v)
press(v)
mixture(n)
scatter(v)

Show out the answers


Listen and tell out
Observe and listen
Read and underline
2. Format of an instruction
First,
Then,

V
V
194

Next ,
Then, ( After that)
Finally,
Introduce the instruction theya re going to
write: How to prepare the dry tea leaves to
keep mosquitoes away
*While-writing(17)
Ask ss to to write their insttruction on
drafting paper
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

* Post-writing (5)
Hang the extra board and ask ss to ask and
answer about the instruction
1) What do you do first?
2) What do you do next?
3) What do you do then?
4) What do you do finally?
Remark and give out the answers

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

V
V
V

The others write on the drafting paper

Observe and remark


Listen and copy
*Suggested writing:
First, take the used tea leaves from the tea
pot.
Next, scatter the tea leaves on a tray.
Then, dry the leaves in the sun.
Finally, put the dry leaves in a pot for future
use.

Pairwork

Listen and answer


Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
Eg: 1) I take the used tea leaves from the tea
pot
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the instruction again in the notebook
195

- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus


*Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 02/02/2012

Period 65

Date of teaching:
8A : 04/02/2012
8B : 08/02/2012
8C : 04/02/2012

UNIT 10 : RECYCLING
Lesson 5 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Passive forms
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause
- Standard: Write the passive forms of an instruction on how to recyle glass
Complete the dialogues using the passive forms in the future tense
Complete the dialogues using the adjectives before a noun clause
Complete the letter using the the adjectives before a noun clause
- Higher : Do some more exercises
+ Vocabulary: break(v); understand(v); believe(v); follow(v); important(a);
mandkind(n); delightted(a); relieved(a)
+ Structures: - Passive forms
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the
environment
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
196

1. The old lesson check-up(1)


Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(6)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
1. Passive forms(25)- Exercise 1, 2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the use, forms of the
passive voice in the commands

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Matching:
build built
show showed
make made
finish finished
wash washed
dry dried
blow blown
Observe and listen

Listen and tell


*Key :
Active
Passive

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


explain the aim
Ask ss to use the active sentences to
change into the passive ones
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

V+O+
O + is/are + V(PII) +

Observe and listen


Individualwork
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) The glass is broken into small pieces
2) The glass is washed with a detergent
liquid
3) The glass pieces are completely dried
4) They are mixed certain specific chemicals
197

Ask ss to give the form of the future


simple tense
Give the forms of the passive of the
future simple tense
Guide ss to do exercise 2
Ask ss to do exercise 2
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

*Adjectives (10) -( Exercise 3,4)


Ask ss to look at the table, the model
sentences and present the aim
Present the forms of adjectives followed
by an infinitive
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to read their sentences
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Ask ss to look at the letter, the model


sentences and present the aim
Present the forms of adjectives followed
by a noun clause
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise

5) The mixture is melted until it becomes a


liquid
6) A long pipe is used, dipped into the liquid,
then the liquid is blown into intended shapes
Observe, listen and tell
S+ will + V + O +
O+ will + be + VPII + +
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
2. Exercise 2
* Answers:
1) will..be started?
2) will be showed
3) willbe built?
4) will be finished
5) willbe made?
Observe and listen
Eg: Its difficult to follow your directions

Do on the drafting paper


3. Exercise 3
* Keys:
1) Its easy to understand
2) Its hard to believe
3) Its dangerous to go
4) Its important to wait
Observe and listen
Observe and listen
Eg: Your grandfather and I are delighted that
you passed your English exam
198

Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to


Ask ss to read their sentences
Ask ss to correct

* Feed-back (2)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
Listen and copy
4. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
1) is happy
2) am relieved
3) is afraid
4) aresure
5) am certain
Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period: Unit 11: Getting started + Listen and read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

Date of preparing: 05/02/2012

Period 66

Date of teaching:
8A : 07/02/2012
8B : 10/02/2012
8C : 07/02/2012

UNIT 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read
199

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a. The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Express the interests to others
- Give and accept or refuse the requests
- Write a story
b. The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue and
check the sentences
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and check the sentences
- Higher: Ask and answer questions about the dialogue
+ Vocabulary: seat(n) ; exciting(a); crop (n); sugar cane(n)
+ Structures : - Ed and ing participles
- Would/ Do you mind if I?
Would/ Do you mind + V(ing)?
2. Skills:
- Make requests
- Listen and show the way to somewhere
- Read and understand the simple advertisements about the places of
tourism
- Write a story using the pictures and the given words
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love their motherland, country.
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
4. The new lesson

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Remark the game
Give the correct answers.

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
Famous
Ha Long
places in VN
200

Sa Pa

*Presentation(10)
Hang the picture set the scene: Tim and his
parents are visiting Hoa. Now Hoa is
meeting them at the airport and they are
going to Hoas house by taxi. This is the
talk on their way to Hoas house
Give ss the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present the new structures in the dialogue

Observe and listen carefully

1. New words
seat(n)
exciting(a)
crop (n)
sugar cane(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
- Would/ Do you mind if I?
- Would/ Do you mind + V(ing)?
Eg: a) Offer requests
- Would you mind if I took a photo?
- Not at all
b) Make requests
- Would you mind sitting in the front
seat of the taxi?
- No problem
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Listen carefully
* Practice (20)
Groupwork
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in groups of 5 to practice the

201

dialogue
Ask 2 groups to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to check the
sentences
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Remark and correct
Observe and rermark
3. Check the sentences
a) T
b) T
c)F : in a taxi
d) T
e) T
f) F: therre are sugar canes,too
Pairwork

Production( 5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions using the information from
the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

*
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson

Listen and answer


4. Answer the questions
* Answers:
a) Where does Hoa want to sit?
She wants to sit with Tim and Shannon
b)How long does it take to drive from the
airport to the city center?
It takes about a 40 minites drive
c) What can they see when they travel
through the rice paddies?
They can see corn,buffaloes, and suagar
canes
d) What does Tim want to do when he sees
sugar canes?
He wants to take a photo
Listen and answer

3. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
202

- Write a short passage about recycling


- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 08/02/2012

Period 67

Date of teaching:
8A : 10/02/2012
8B : 11/02/2012
8C : 10/02/2012

UNIT 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM


Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
a) The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Make and reply to the requests and suggestions
- Listen to the dialogue and check the places in the map
- Standard: Make and reply to the requests and suggestions
Listen to the dialogue and check the places in the map
- Higher: Ask some more questions about the dialogue
b)Vocabulary: direction(n); starve(v); book(v).
c) Structures:
Requests
Do you mind + V(ing)?
Would you mind + V(ing)?

Suggestions
Do you mind if I + V?
Would you mind if I + V(ed)?
How about + V(ing)?
I suggest + V(ing)

2. Skills:
+ Speaking: Make and reply to the requests and suggestions
+ Listening: Listen and check the places in the map
203

3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love their country, native land
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Take a survey" * Take a survey:
S1: How much is a/an?
S2: Itsdong (They are dong)
*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the aim through the picture
Ask ss to look at the model dialogue
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present the new structures to ask and
answer about giving the instructions

Observe and listen carefully


1. New words
direction(n)
starve(v)
book(v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
Requests
Do you mind + V(ing)?
Would you mind + V(ing)
?
- No, I dont mind
- No, of course not
- Not at all
- Please do
- Please go ahead

Suggestions
Do you mind if I +
V?
Would you mind if I +
V(ed)?
How about + V(ing)?
I suggest + V(ing)
- Im sorry, I cant
- Im sorry, that is not
possible
- I prefer you didnt
- Id rather you didnt

204

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Ask ss to look at the tables and present
the aim
Make some examples on the board

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
Observe and listen
Eg:
1) - Do/ Would you mind closing the window?
- No, I dont mind
2) - Do you mind if I take a photo?
- I prefer you didnt
3) - Would you mind if I took a photo?
- Please do
Pairwork

*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs to make similar
dialogues with the partner
Ask 4 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct
answers
* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the map and present the situation:
Tim, Shannon and Mr and Mrs. Brown
are visiting the Hoas town
*While-listening (8)
Play the tape ( 3 times)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct
answers

* Post-listening (2)
Ask ss to answer:
- How does Tim feel?
- What about Shannon?

Observe, listen and remark


Observe and listen carefully

Listen carefully
Listen again and check the sentences
* Answers: a) restaurant ; b) hotel ; c) bus
station ; d) pagoda ; e) temple
Pairwork and answer

Listen and answer

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

205

3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make questions and answers about part Speak
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 09/02/2012

Period 68

Date of teaching:
8A : 11/02/2012
8B : 14/02/2012
8C : 11/02/2012

UNIT 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM


Lesson 3 : Read

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
a)The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the
advertisement about the resorts in Viet Nam
- Standard: Read and check the topic mentioned (exercise 1), then answer the
questions
- Higher: Answer some more questions (exercise 2)
b) Vocabulary: resort (n); sight (n); accommodation (n); arrival (n); departure (n);
stream (n); heritage (n); tribe(n); sunbathe(v)
c)Structures: Present simple
2. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and answer the questions (exercise 2) and
check the sentences (exercise 1)
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beautiful sights in their country
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
2. Students: review present simple and vocabulary of places
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up( 3)
206

Ask 2: What do you do on the weekend?


2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5) Game: Networks

Students activities
The whole class play together play on the stage

Famous
places in VN
Remark the results and present the new
lesson
* Pre-reading (12)
Present some new words

1. New words
resort (n)
sight (n)
accommodation (n)
arrival (n)
departure (n)
stream (n)
heritage (n)
tribe(n)
sunbathe(v)

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves

* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently
Ask ss to check the topics mentioned in
the brochures
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Read the text silently


Use the information in the advertisement to
check
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. Check the topics
Answers:
Sights

Nha

Da

Sa

Ha

207

caves
flights to Ha Noi
hotels
local transport
mini-hotels
mountain slopes
railways
restaurants
sand beaches
tourist attractions
types of food
villages
waterfalls
World Heritage

Ask ss to read the text silently again read


the suggestions and answer the questions
- Where should Andrew/ Mary/ John/
Joanne/ Donna go?
Ask ss to read their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Trang

Lat

Pa

Long

Pairwork

Listen and answer


Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
3. Answer the questions
a) Andrew should go to Sa Pa
b) Mary should go to NhaTrang
c) John should go to Nha Rong Habour
d) Joanne should go to Ha Long Bay
e) Donna should go to Da Lat

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to answer some other questions
Listen and answer
-Why should Andrew should go to Sa
Pa?
-Why should Mary should go to
NhaTrang?
-Why should John should go to Nha
Rong Habour?
-Why should Joanne should go to Ha
Long Bay?
-Why should Donna should go to Da Lat?
*Key:

208

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

- Because he can see tribal villages


Listen and answer

3. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Write 5 sentences about the five resotrs
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
*Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 09/02/2012

Period 69

Date of teaching:
8A : 11/02/2012
8B : 14/02/2012
8C : 11/02/2012

UNIT 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM


Lesson 4 : Write

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a story using a model one
and the pictures and the given words
- Standard: write a story using a model story and the pictures and the given words
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the story
+ Vocabulary: stumble (v); fall(v); realize(v); go off(v); pool(v); rescue(v); drop(v)
+ Structures: Format of a story
2. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using a model story
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the story
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be careful with the danger of the weather
I. Preparations
209

1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards


2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to answer
What did you do yesterday/ last week?
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a story
*Pre- writing(10)
Give ss some necessary words

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Matching
1) be get try move rain
2) rained was/were tried
got

moved

Observe and listen


1. New words
stumble (v)
fall(v)
realize(v)
go off(v)
pool(v)
rescue(v)
drop(v)

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Present the situation of the model story
Ask ss to read the sentences and put them
in the correct chronological order to
complete the story
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct
Ask ss to read the story again and
underline the verbs in the past tense
Introduce the story they are going to write
Ask ss to look at the pictures and talk
about the whole story
Ask ss to rearrange the pictures in the right
order

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
Listen carefully
Read silently an complete it
Show out the answers
Read and underline
2. Answers
c) , a), g) , d) , f) , b) , e)
Observe and answer
Read and arrange
210

Notice ss about the verbs in the past simple


or past continous tense
*While-writing(17)
Ask ss to to write their story on drafting
paper
The others write on the drafting paper
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the story individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Observe and remark
Remark and give out the answers
Listen and copy
*Suggested writing:
She had a Math exam on Friday and she
got up late. She realized her alarm clock
didnt go off. As she was leaving home, it
started to rain heavily. Uyen tried to run as
fast as she could. Suddenly, she stumbled
against a rock and fell. Her school bag
went into a pool and everything got wet.
Strangely, the rain stopped as she got to her
* Post-writing (5)
classroom. Luckily, Uyen had enough time
Hang the extra board and ask ss to ask and to finishher exam
answer about the story
1) Did Uyen get up late?
Pairwork and answer
2) Why did she get up late?
3) Was the weather bad when she was
leaving home?
4) What happened to her when she ran
as fast as she could?
5) Did she have enough time to finish
her exam?
Ask ss to answer
Remark and give out the answers
Observe and correct
* Feed-back (1)
Correct by themselves
What is the main content of the lesson?
Listen and answer
3. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the instruction again in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
211

*Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy


+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 12/02/2012

Period 70

Date of teaching:
8A : 14/02/2012
8B : 15/02/2012
8C : 14/02/2012

UNIT 11 : TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM


Lesson 5 : Language focus

I. The aim of the lesson


1. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- ed and ing participles
- Requests with: Mind
- Standard: Describe the people and the goods in the two pictures(a,b)
Complete the requests using the passive forms in the future tense
Complete the dialogues using the adjectives before a noun clause
Complete the letter using the the adjectives before a noun clause
- Higher: Do some more exercises
+ Vocabulary: cigarette(n); smoke(v); air conditioner(n); put out(v); turn on(v);
turn off(v); cancel(v)
+ Structures: - ed and ing participles
- Requests with: mind
2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
3. Education: Educate ss to learn hard be polite
II. Preparations
1. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
2. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
III. The stages of the lesson
1. The old lesson check-up(1)
212

Check ss preparations
2. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(6)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
1. ed and ing(25)- Exercise 1, 2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the pictures
Ask ss to tell the forms of the verbs in
ed or ing forms:
- read, talk, play, go, watch
- wrap, recycle, paint, dress, keep, make

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Matching:
sit sat
put put
get got
make made
keep kept
recycle recycled
paint painted
Observe and listen

Listen and tell


*Key :
V(ing)
reading
talking
playing
going
watching

V(ed)
wrapped
recycled
dressed
painted
kept
made

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


Observe and listen
explain the aim
Ask ss to use the model sentence to make
description of the people in the picture (a) Individualwork
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Listen and correct
Remark and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) The boy reading a book is Ba
213

Ask ss to do the same with exercise 2 but


for the things not people, we use V(ed)
Guide ss to do exercise 2
Ask ss to do exercise 2
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

2) The boy talking to Miss Lien is Nam


3) The woman talking to Nam is Miss Lien
4) The girsl playing chess are Hoa and Nga
5) The girl watching Nga and Hoa is Lan
6) The man walking up the stairs is
Mr. Quang
Individual work
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
2. Exercise 2
* Answers:
1) The old lamp made in China is five dollars
2) The box painted green is one dollar
3) The doll dressed in pink is two dollars
4) The flowers wrapped in yellow paper are
one dollar
5) The toys kept in the box are ten dollars
6) The truck recycled from cans is two
dollars

* Mind (10) -( Exercise 3,4)


Ask ss to look at the table, the model
sentences and present the aim
Present the forms of making and
responding to requests using mind
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do practice
Ask ss to work in pairs
Ask ss to practice
Ask ss to remark andcorrect
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen


Eg: Do/ Would you mind moving your car?
No, of course not

Pairwork

3. Exercise 3
* Keys:
1) Do you mind moving your car?
No, of course not
2) Would you mind getting me some coffee?
Im sorry, I cant
3) Do you mind putting out your cigarette?
214

Ask ss to look at the pictures, the model


sentences and present the aim
Present the forms of mind to make
requests
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise

Not at all
4) Do you mind waiting me a moment?
Im sorry, I cant
Observe and listen

Eg: - Do you mind if I sit here?


Would you mind if I sat here
- Please do
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to read their sentences
Ask ss to correct

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
Listen and copy
Remark and correct
4. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
1) Do you mind if I sit here?
Please do
2) Would you mind if I smoked?
Id rather you didnt
3) Do you mind if I cancel our meeting?
Not at all
4) Would you mind if I turned off the stereo?
I prefer you didnt
5) Do you mind if I turn on the
air- conditioner?
Please do
5) Do you mind if I watch TV while I am
eating?
Please do

* Feed-back (2)
What is the main content of the lesson?
Listen and answer
3. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period: Review from Unit 9 to Unit 11 to prepare for the
test(45minutes)
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
215

+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 15/02/2012

Date of teaching:
8A : 17/02/2012
8B : 17/02/2012
8C : 17/02/2012

Period 71
REVISION
1. The aims of the lesson
a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary from Unit 9 to Unit 11
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme personal information
+ Structures :
- Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and
promises
- in order to / so as to
- Passive forms in commands and future simple
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause
- mind to make requests
- ed and ing participles
b. Skills: 4 skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, exercises
b. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary from unit 9-11
3. The stages of the lesson
a.The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities
216

* Warm-up (2)
Listen and answer
Say hello to the students
How are you?
Today were going to review the main
grammar points and vocabulary from unit
9 to unit 11
* Review(30)
Ask ss to retell the use, forms of future Listen and retell
simple
1. Make requests with will
Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss Three groups make and show out their
sentences
discuss to make examples
Remark and correct
Ask the class to retell the use of in order
to / so as to and make 2 examples on the
2. in order to / so as to
board
Eg:
Remark and correct
She goes to the market to/ so as to/ in order to
buy some flowers
Ask the class to retell the forms of the
passive verbs and make 3 examples on the 3. Passive forms in commands and future
simple
board
Eg: Glass is broken into small pieces
Remark and correct
Trees are cut down
The house will be paiinted
Ask the class to retell the use, form of
adjectives followed by an infinitive or a
noun clause and make 2 examples on the
board
Remark and correct

4. Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a


noun clause
Eg: It is easy to learn English
He is happy that she is fine

Ask the class to retell the use, form of


mindand make 2 examples on the board 5. mind to make requests
Remark and correct
- Do/ Would you mind if I V/ VP1?
- Would/ Do you mind + V(ing)?
Eg:
- Do/ Would you mind opening the window?
- Not at all
- Do you mind if I sit here?
217

- Please do
Or - Would you mind if I sat here?
- Please do
Ask the class to retell the use of
- ed and ing participles
Ask ss to make 2 examples on the board
Remark and correct

6. ed and ing participles


Listen and answer
Eg: The boy reading a book is Ba
The doll made in China is 5 dollars

* Feed-back(3)
Ask ss to tell the main grammar points Listen and answer
that thay have to review

c. Homework (2)
Review from unit 9 to unit 11 to prepare for the next lesson: Test 45 minutes
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 15/02/2012

Period 72

Date of teaching:
8A : 18/02/2012
8B : 17/02/2012
8C : 18/02/2012

TEST
Time: 45 minutes

1.The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, the teacher will check ss vocabulary, grammar
and knowledges from unit 9 to unit 11
218

+ Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 9 to unit 11


+ Structures:
- Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and
promises
- in order to / so as to
- Passive forms in commands and future simple
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause
- mind to make requests
- ed and ing participles
b. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2. Matrix
*For class 8B and 8C
Tn
Ch

Listening

Nhn bit
TNKQ

Thng hiu
TL

TNKQ

TL

TL

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

Traveling,
Recycling,
First aids
(Multiple
choice)
4 cu x 0,5 =
2,0

4 cu
2= 20%

Traveling,
Recycling,
First aids
(Multiple choice)
5 cu x 0.5 = 2,5

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

Writing

10 cu
4,0 im= 40%

Cng
5 cu
1,5 =
15%

First aids
(Tick True/
False )
5 cu x
0,5=2,5

Vocabulary

S cu
S im

TN
KQ

Recycling(Order the
sentences )
5 cu x 0.3 = 1,5

Reading

Grammar

Vn dng

4 cu
2,0 im=20%

5 cu
2,5 im=
25%

Recycling
Rearrange
the words )
5 cu x 0,3
= 1,5
5 cu
1,5 im=
15%

5 cu
1,5 =
15%
24 cu
100%

219

3. Preparations
a.Teacher : Photo the tests : 68 sheets
b. Students: review from unit 9 to unit 11, drafting paper.
4. Questions
I. Nghe on vn v sp xp cc cu theo th t trong bi nghe ( 1,5 points)
Th t
a. Blow the liquid into intended shapes
b. Wash the glass pieces then dry them completely
c. Melt the glass pieces
d. Mix the glass pieces with a specific chemicals
e. Break the glass into small pieces
II. c hng dn s cu sau v tch cu ng sai (2,5 points)
TREATMENTS FOR FAINTING
- Leave the patient lying flat
- Dont force him or her to sit or stand
- Elevate the patients feet or lower his/ her head below the level of the heart
- Dont let the victim get cold
- Give him/her a cup of tea when he/she revives
* Tch () cu ng sai
1. We should leave the victim lye flat
2. The victim should sit or stand
3. The victims head should be above the level of the heart
4. The victim must be kept warm
5. The victim should drink a cup of water when reviving

III. Khoanh trn vo t ph hp v ngha hon thnh cc cu sau (2,0 points)


1. We collect bottles and cans to send to the factory
for
a. reducing
b. recycling
c. reusing
d. cycling
2. Buses, mini buses, trains or planes are
.
a. transport
b. accommodation
c. sights
d.types of food
3. ..is used to make compost
a. plastic
b. paper
c. metal
d. vegetable matter
4. When you get.., you have to cool the burns under a running cold tap
a. shock
b. fainting
c. burns
d. bleeding
220

IV. Khoanh trn vo p n ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2,5 points)


1. you open the window, please?
a. Will
b. Shall
c. May
d. Wont
2. It is difficult the guitar
a. play
b. to play
c. playing
d. played
3. Do you mind ..me some milk?
a. buy
b. bought
c. to buy
d. buying
4. Would you mind if I ..?
a. smoked
b. smoke
c. smoking
d. to smoke
5. The boy ..a book is Ba
a. read
b. reads
c. reading
d. to read
V. Sp xp cc t sau theo ng th t to thnh cu c ngha (1,5 points)
1. She / be / in two hours / here / will.
2. are / recycled / Car tires / to make / pipes and floor coverings.
3. am/ I / happy / you / that / passed / your exam.
4. I / get / you / some / can / water?
5. wont / I / promise / I / play/ in the house again / soccer.
6. in order to / I / go to the market/ buy / some food.
5. Answer keys
I. Nghe on vn v sp xp cc cu theo th t trong bi nghe ( 1,5 points)
5 x 0,3 = 1,5 points

a. Blow the liquid into intended shapes


b. Wash the glass pieces then dry them completely
c. Melt the glass pieces
d. Mix the glass pieces with a specific chemicals
e. Break the glass into small pieces

Th t
5
2
4
3
1

Tapetranscript:
This is a guide on how to recycle glass
- Break the glass into small pieces
221

- Wash the glass pieces then dry them completely


- Mix the glass pieces with a specific chemicals
- Melt the glass pieces
- Blow the liquid into intended shapes
II. c hng dn s cu sau v tch cu ng sai (2,5 points)
5 x 0,5 = 2,5 points
* Tch () cu ng sai
1. We should leave the victim lye flat
2. The victim should sit or stand
3. The victims head should be above the level of the heart
4. The victim must be kept warm
5. The victim should drink a cup of water when reviving

III. Khoanh trn vo t ph hp v ngha hon thnh cc cu sau (2,0 points)


4 x 0,5 = 2,0 points
1. b
2. a
3. d
4. c
IV. Khoanh trn vo p n ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2,5 points)
5 x 0,5 = 2,5 points
1. a
2. b
3. d
4. a
5. c
V. Sp xp cc t, cm t sau theo ng th t to thnh cu c ngha (1,5
points)
6 x 0,25 = 1,5 points
1. She will be here in two hours.
2. Car tires are recycled to make pipes and floor coverings.
3. I am happy that you passed your exam.
4. Can I get you some water?
5. I promise I wont play soccer in the house again .
6. I go to the market in order to buy some food.
*For class 8A
Tn

Nhn bit

Thng hiu

Vn dng

Cng

222

Ch

Listening

TNKQ

TL

TNKQ

TL
5 cu
1,5 =
15%

First aids
(Tick True/
False )
5 cu x
0,5=2,5

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

Traveling,
Recycling,
First aids
(Multiple
choice)
4 cu x 0,5 =
2,0

Vocabulary

4 cu
2= 20%

Traveling,
Recycling,
First aids
(Multiple choice)
5 cu x 0.5 = 2,5

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

Writing

S cu
S im

TN
KQ

Recycling(Order the
sentences )
5 cu x 0.3 = 1,5

Reading

Grammar

TL

10 cu
4,0 im= 40%

4 cu
2,0 im=20%

5 cu
2,5 im=
25%

Recycling
Write
sentences
using given
words )
5 cu x 0,3
= 1,5
5 cu
1,5 im=
15%

5 cu
1,5 =
15%

24 cu
100%

3. Preparations
a.Teacher : Photo the tests : 34 sheets
b. Students: review from unit 9 to unit 11, drafting paper.
4. Questions
I. Nghe on vn v sp xp cc cu theo th t trong bi nghe ( 1,5 points)
Th t
a. Blow the liquid into intended shapes
b. Wash the glass pieces then dry them completely
c. Melt the glass pieces
d. Mix the glass pieces with a specific chemicals
223

e. Break the glass into small pieces


II. c hng dn s cu sau v tch cu ng sai (2,5 points)
TREATMENTS FOR FAINTING
- Leave the patient lying flat
- Dont force him or her to sit or stand
- Elevate the patients feet or lower his/ her head below the level of the heart
- Dont let the victim get cold
- Give him/her a cup of tea when he/she revives
* Tch () cu ng sai
1. We should leave the victim lye flat
2. The victim should sit or stand
3. The victims head should be above the level of the heart
4. The victim must be kept warm
5. The victim should drink a cup of water when reviving

III. Khoanh trn vo t ph hp v ngha hon thnh cc cu sau (2,0 points)


1. We collect bottles and cans to send to the factory
for
a. reducing
b. recycling
c. reusing
d. cycling
2. Buses, mini buses, trains or planes are
.
a. transport
b. accommodation
c. sights
d.types of food
3. ..is used to make compost
a. plastic
b. paper
c. metal
d. vegetable matter
4. When you get.., you have to cool the burns under a running cold tap
a. shock
b. fainting
c. burns
d. bleeding
IV. Khoanh trn vo p n ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2,5 points)
1. you open the window, please?
a. Will
b. Shall
c. May
d. Wont
2. It is difficult the guitar
a. play
b. to play
c. playing
d. played
3. Do you mind ..me some milk?
a. buy
b. bought
c. to buy
d. buying
4. Would you mind if I ..?
a. smoked
b. smoke
c. smoking
d. to smoke
5. The boy ..a book is Ba
a. read
b. reads
c. reading
d. to read
224

V. Da vo cc t gi sau t thnh cu c ngha (1,5 points)


1. She / be / here / tomorrow.
2. Car tires / recycle / make / pipes and floor coverings.
3. I / happy / that / you / pass / your exam.
4. Can / I / get / you / water?
5. I/ promise / not / play / soccer/ house / again.
6. I / go / market / in order to/ buy / some rice / yesterday
5. Answer keys
I. Nghe on vn v sp xp cc cu theo th t trong bi nghe ( 1,5 points)
5 x 0,3 = 1,5 points

a. Blow the liquid into intended shapes


b. Wash the glass pieces then dry them completely
c. Melt the glass pieces
d. Mix the glass pieces with a specific chemicals
e. Break the glass into small pieces

Th t
5
2
4
3
1

Tapetranscript:
This is a guide on how to recycle glass
- Break the glass into small pieces
- Wash the glass pieces then dry them completely
- Mix the glass pieces with a specific chemicals
- Melt the glass pieces
- Blow the liquid into intended shapes
II. c hng dn s cu sau v tch cu ng sai (2,5 points)
5 x 0,5 = 2,5 points
* Tch () cu ng sai
1. We should leave the victim lye flat
2. The victim should sit or stand
3. The victims head should be above the level of the heart
4. The victim must be kept warm
5. The victim should drink a cup of water when reviving

225

III. Khoanh trn vo t ph hp v ngha hon thnh cc cu sau (2,0 points)


4 x 0,5 = 2,0 points
1. b
2. a
3. d
4. c
IV. Khoanh trn vo p n ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2,5 points)
5 x 0,5 = 2,5 points
1. a
2. b
3. d
4. a
5. c
V. Da vo cc t gi sau t thnh cu c ngha (1,5 points)
6 x 0,25 = 1,5 points
1. She will be here tomorrow.
2. Car tires are recycled to make pipes and floor coverings.
3. I am happy that you passed your exam.
4. Can I get you some water?
5. I promise I wont play soccer in the house again .
6. I go to the market in order to buy some rice.
6. Homework (1)
- Do the test again in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 12 : Getting started + Listen and read.
* Nhn xt bi kim tra
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:...
+ Thi gian ca tng phn:
+ Ni dung kin thc:
....

Date of preparing: 19/02/2012

Period 73

Date of teaching:
8A : 21/02/2012
8B : 21/02/2012
8C : 21/02/2012

CORRECTING THE TEST


226

1.The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected
and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in
the next lessons
+ Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 9 to unit 11
+ Structures:
- Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and
promises
- in order to / so as to
- Passive forms in commands and future simple
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause
- mind to make requests
- ed and ing participles
b. Skills : Listening, reading, writing skills and grammar
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2.Preparations
a.Teacher give points to the tests
b. Students: review from unit 9 to unit 11.
3. The stages of the lesson
a.The old lesson check- up(1)
Check ss preparations
b.The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

* Pre-correcting (10)
Give the tests to ss
Remark the tests generally through the main Get and observe
Observe and listen carefully
mistakes in each part of the test
* While- correcting(30)
Go through each part of the test, ask ss to
point out the correct answer of each
sentence, and explain why

Look at each part of the test, point out the


correct answer of each sentence, and
explain why
I. 0,3 x 0,5= 1,5 points.
Tapetranscript:
This is a guide on how to recycle glass
- Break the glass into small pieces
- Wash the glass pieces then dry them
227

completely
- Mix the glass pieces with a specific
chemicals
- Melt the glass pieces
- Blow the liquid into intended shapes
1. 5
2. 2
3. 4
4. 3
5. 1
II. 5x0,5 = 2,5 points
1. T
2. F
3. F
4. T
5. F
III. 4x0,5= 2 points
1. b
2. a
3. d
4. c
IV. 5x0,5= 2,5 points
1. a
2. b
3. d
4. a
5. c
V. 6x0,25= 1,5 points
1. She will be here tomorrow.
2. Car tires are recycled to make pipes and
floor coverings.
3. I am happy that you passed your exam.
4. Can I get you some water?
5. I promise I wont play soccer in the
house again.
6. I go to the market in order to buy some
rice

* Post-correcting( 2)
Ask ss to tell what they could and could not
Listen and tell out
do in the test and know the way to improve
the knowlege in the next test
* Feed- back(1)
Remind the thing that ss did well and they
Listen and remember
did badly in the test.

c. Homework (1)
- Do the test again in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 12: Getting started + Listen and read

228

Date of preparing: 20/02/2012

Period 74

Date of teaching:
8A : 23/02/2012
8B : 22/02/2012
8C : 23/02/2012

UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Make a schedule for a vacation
- Listen to the weather reports and fill in the blanks with the information
- Read postcards and complete the table and answer the questions
- Write a postcard
+ The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue
between Mrs. Smith and Mrs. Quyen on the phone for general or detailed information
- Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to complete the schedule and answer
the questions
- Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue
+ Vocabulary: abroad(adv); tour(n); include (v); price(n); pick SO up(v); come
over(v)
+ Structures : - Past progressive tense
- Past progressive tense with when and while
- Progressive tenses with always
b. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and know how to plan for a vacation
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b.The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5) Matching game :
Ask ss to play the game Matching game
Use the pictures and the words on the
board

Students activities

Two groups play on the stage


* Answers:
229

Remark the game


Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene:

Listen carefully

Mrs.Quyen and Mrs. Smith. Mrs. Quyen


and Mr. Thanh are going to come on a tour
to San Francisco on Monday. Now Mrs.
Quyen is calling Mrs. Smith to announce
her about that
Give ss the new words
Observe and listen

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus

1. New words
230

Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present the new structures in the dialogue

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to choose the topic
covered in the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

abroad(adv)
tour(n)
include (v)
price(n)
pick SO up(v)
come over(v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
Past progressive:
Eg:
I was doing my homework at 8 last night
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen

Observe and rermark


*Production( 5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions
Ask 3 pairs to ask and answer
Remark and correct

3. Answer
Date
Monday 25
Tuesday 26
Wednesday 27
Thursday 28

Schedule
Coming to San Francisco
Going out
Having dinner with the. Smiths
Leaving San Francisco

Pairwork
Listen and answer
231

1. How long will Mrs. Quyen and her


husband stay in San Francisco?
2.When will they leave Francisco?
* Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

* Key:
1. No, they wont. Because their accommodation
is included in the ticket price
2. No, he wont. Because he will have a business
meeting
3. Mrs. Smith will pick her up at the hotel
Listen and answer

Listen and answer


c. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write an instruction for a bad cut first aid
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

Date of preparing: 21/02/2012

Period 75

Date of teaching:
8A : 24/02/2012
8B : 23/02/2012
8C : 24/02/2012

UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD


Lesson 2 : Speak

1. The aim of the lesson


232

a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make a schedule for a vacation
- Standard: Make a schedule for a vacation and ask and answer about it
- Higher: Write a passage about their vacation
+ Vocabulary: sightseeing(n); rate(n); per(n); gym(n); double(n).
+ Structures : The present simple to talk about the schedule
b. Skills: speaking and wrting skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be helpful
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Divide the class into 2 teams and ask them
to play on the stage

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
* Networks
should

Modal
s

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- speaking(10)
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake

shall

Modal
s

1. New words
sightseeing(n)
rate(n)
per(n)
gym(n)
double(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
233

Present the structures to ask and answer


questions to complete the itinerary

Observe listen and answer


2. Structures
Eg:
- Where shall we stay?
- The Revere Hotel is expensive but it has a
gym
- What time shoul we leave Los Angeles?
- Theres a daily flight at 10 am. Would that
be OK?

Hang the advertisement and ask ss to


practice in exchange pairs to make
questions to complete their partners
schedule
*While-speaking(17)
Go around the classroom to help ss practice
Ask students to practice in pairs before the
class
Remark and correct the mispronunciation

Pairwork

* Post- speaking (10)


Now ask ss to look at the schedule on the
board and practice
Ask ss to pairwork
Ask some pairs to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen carefully

* Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?

Listen and answer

Listen carefully and check


Correct by themselves
Observe and listen carefully
* Answers:
A: What time should we leave Los Angeles?
B: We should leave at 11 am on Monday
A: What time shall we arrive Boston?
B: We shall arrive at 6 pm
A: Where shall we stay?
B: We shall stay at the Atlantic hotel
A: What shall we see there?
B: We shall see Boston University and art
galaries
A: What time shall we leave Boston?
B: We shall leave at 10 am on Thursday

Pairwork
Listen carefully and check
Remark and correct

234

c. Homework(1)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the sentences in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Listen
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 22/02/2012

Period 76

Date of teaching:
8A : 25/02/2012
8B : 24/02/2012
8C : 25/02/2012

UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD


Lesson 3 : Listen

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to the weather reports
and fill in the blanks in the table with the information they hear
- Standard: Listen and fill in the table
- Higher: answer some questions about the weather reports
+ Vocabulary: temperature(n); centigrade(n) =degree(n); windy(a); humid(a) = wet(a);
snowy(a); cloudy(a); minus (n); centigrade(n); zero(n).
+ Structures: The future simple tense. Be going to
b. Skills:
+ Listening: Listen to the weather reports and and fill in the blanks in the table with
the information they hear
+ Speaking: Ask and answer some questions about the report
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay healthy, eat sensibly
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
235

b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary


3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask: What will you do tomorrow?
What are you going to do tonight?
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Pelmanism

Students activities
The whole class play together
* Pelmanism
1
sun
5
windy

2
rain

3
wind

6
sunny

7
cloudy

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- listening(10)
Present the new words

* Key
1 6 ; 28; 3 5; 4 7

Ask ss to repeat the new words in


chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to retell the structures of future
simple tense
Hang the pisture and present the
situation: You are going to listen to the
weather reports for the international

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves

4
cloud
8
rainy

1. New words
temperature(n)
centigrade(n) =degree(n)
windy(a)
humid(a) = wet(a)
snowy(a)
cloudy(a)
minus (n)
centigrade(n)
zero(n)

Observe listen and answer


Observe and listen

236

traveler
Present the structure to talk about the
weather forecast

Guide ss to read the temperature


Eg: 00C: zero degree
- 50C: minus five degrees
320C: thirty two degrees
* While- listening (10)
Play the tape (3times)
Ask ss to give out their answers on the
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Post- listening (10)


Ask ss to ask and answer
What will the weather be like in
Sydney/
/ Tokyo/ London/ Paris?
Ask ss to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

2. Structures
Eg:
- Tokyo will be dry and windy
Pairwork
- London is going to have a humid day
- The low will be 20 and the high will be 26
- It will be cloudy with a low of 8 and a high of
15
Listen carefully and check
Listen carefully and repeat in chorus

Listen carefully
Compare with a partner
* Answers:
City

Weather

1. Sydney
2.Tokyo
3. London
4. Bangkok
5. New York
6. Paris

dry,windy
dry,windy
humid, cold
warm, dry
windy, cloudy
cool, dry

Temperature
Hig
Low
h
20
26
15
22
-3
7
24
32
8
15
10
16

Pairwork

Listen carefully and check


Correct by themselves
* Answers:
- It will be dry and windy with the low of 20
degrees and the high of 26 degrees
237

Listen and answer


* Feed-back (3)
What is the main content of the lesson?
c. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the instruction in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 26/02/2012

Period 77

Date of teaching:
8A : 28/02/2012
8B : 28/02/2012
8C : 28/02/2012

UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD


Lesson 4 : Read

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the
postcards about Mrs. Quyens vacation in the USA
- Standard: Read and fill in the table and answer the questions
- Higher: Retell the Mrs. Quyens itinerary
+ Vocabulary: lava (n); wharf (n); volcano (n) ; valley (n); wine-growing (n); island
(n); carve (v); situate (v).
+ Structures: past simple tense
b. Skills : Reading-comprehension skills: fill in the table and answer the questions
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
238

b. Students: review modal verbs, past simple and vocabulary of places


3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss to answer: Have you ever been to Ha Long Bay?
What did you do there?
b. The new lesson

Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5): Game: Networks
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks : Places in the USA
New York

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
What did Mrs. Quyen do on her vacation
in the USA?

Golden Gate Bridge

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)


Pairwork and give out their ideas
- visited the Smiths
- had dinner with the Smiths
-

Present some new words

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read

1. New words
lava (n)
wharf (n)
volcano (n)
valley (n)
wine-growing (n)
island (n)
carve (v)
situate (v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
239

Remark and correct the mistake


Notice ss about the verbs in the past
tenses
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently and write
the what Mrs. Quyen did and saw in each
of the places
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Listen carefully
Read the text silently
Observe and correct
Correct
Correct by themselves
2. Complete the table
Answers:
Place
Hawaii
New York
Chicago
Mount
Rushmore
San
Francisc
o

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to draw a
mindmap about the things Mrs. Quyen
did and saw in the places
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

What she did and saw


went swimming, visited KilaueaVolcano
went shopping, bought lots of souvenirs
saw lake Michigan
saw the heads of 4 American presidents
visited Fhishermans Wharf, the Napa
Valley wine- growing area and the
Alcatraz prison

Pairwork

Observe and correct


Correct by themselves
* Mindmap:
Hawaii
New
York
What
Mrs. Quyen
did and saw
Chicag
240
o

San
Francisc
o

Mount
Rushmore

c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period : Part Write
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 27/02/2012

Period 78

Date of teaching:
8A : 02/03/2012
8B : 29/02/2012
8C : 02/03/2012

UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD


Lesson 5 : Write

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges

241

+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a postcard to a friend
about their trip using word cues and the model postcard
- Standard: write the postcard using word cues and the the model postcard
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the postcard
+ Vocabulary: wonderful (a); complain(v); suitcase(n); hospitable(a); relative(n).
+ Structures: Structure of writing a postcard the position
Past simle tense
Present perfect tense
to buy something for someone
b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model postcard
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the postcard
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be friendly
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 114 and ask:
What did Mrs. Quyen do and see in the USA?
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities

The whole class play together


* Networks:
helful
generous
Adj of
characters

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a postcard
*Pre- writing(10)
Ask ss to tell the prepositions of position
Give ss some necessary words

Observe and listen


Listen and tell
1. New words
wonderful (a)
242

complain(v)
suitcase(n)
hospitable(a)
relative(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the postcard that Mrs.
Quyen sent to her children. Notice ss about
the verbs in the past.
Ask ss to give out their answers
Show out the answers
Remark and correct
Ask ss to discuss groups of 4 to think
Discuss and give out their ideas
about:
- Name of the place they visit:
- How they feel about the people:
- What the weather like:
- Who they meet:
- What they see:
- What they buy:
Observe and listen
Remark and giude ss to write the postcard
*While-writing(17)
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

Listen and copy


*Answers:
Dear Lan,
We are having a wonderful time in England.
The people are helpful and the weather has
been cool and windy.
In London, I visited my friends, Peter Gate
and his family. It was nice to see them.
I bought a lot of souvenirs for my parents.
Nga is always complaining about the
heaviness of my suitcase.
See you soon.
Love,

Listen and answer


243

* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss some questions about the postcard
Remark and give out the answers
- Where did you visit?
- What were the people like?
- What was the weather like there?
- Who did you visit?
- Did you buy a lot of souvenirs?

Observe and correct


Correct by themselves

c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write another passage to describe one of your rooms
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 04/3/2012
Date of teaching:
8A : 06/3/2012
8B : 06/3/2012
8C : 06/3/2012
Period 79

UNIT 12 : A VACATION ABROAD


Lesson 6 : Language focus

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Past progressive tense with while and when
- Present progressive tense with always
- Standard: Complete the sentences using the pictures
Match the half sentences
Complete the dialogues using the reflexive pronouns
Write sentences using the words and the pictures
244

- Higher : Ask and answer some more questions


+ Vocabulary: mailman(n); race (n); drum(n); crowd(n); cheer(v); ring(v); lose(v)
+ Structures: Progressive tenses
b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson

Teachers activities

Students activities

245

*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Three groups play on the stage


* Networks:
often
Adverbs
of
frequenc
usually
y

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
* Past continuous(20)- Exercise 1
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the use and forms of past
progressive and past simple

Observe and listen

Listen and tell


*Key :
S+ was/were+ Ving + ...
S+ V(ed) + ...

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


explain the aim
Ask ss to use the pictures in part 1 to
complete the sentences
Ask some pairs to practice their sentences
Remark and correct

Observe and listen


Pairwork
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) Ba was taking a shower at 8 last night
2) Hoa was having dinner at 8 last night
3) Bao was doing his homework at 8 last
night
4) Nga was writing a letter at 8 last night
5) Na was walking at 8 last night
6) Lan was talking to her grandma at 8 last
night
246

Ask ss to look at the pictures and prresent


the aim of exercise 2
Ask ss to work in pairs to match the half
sentences
Ask some pairs to practice
Remark and correct

Pairwork
Remark and correct

2. Exercise 2.
* Keys:
aC
bF
cE
dB
eD
*Present continuous tense with always f A
(12) -( Exercise 3)
Ask ss to look at the pictures and present
the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
Observe and listen
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Observe and listen
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Do on the drafting paper
Remark and give out the answers
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
3. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
1) Bao is always forgetting his homework
2) Mrs. Nga is always losing her umbrella
3) Mr. and Mrs. Thanh are always missing
the bus
4) Nam is always watching TV
5) Na is always talking on the phone
6) Liem is always going out

c. Feed-back (5)
Ask ss some questions:
247

Who is always reading in our class?...


d. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Learn all vocabulary and grammar.
- Prerpare for the next period: Unit 13: Getting started + Listen and read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

248

Date of preparing: 05/3/2012

Period 80

Date of teaching:
8A : 09/3/2012
8B : 07/3/2012
8C : 09/3/2012

UNIT 13 : FESTIVALS
Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Talk about a traditional festival
- Ask and answer questions prepared for a festival
- Tell, write a statement paragraph about a happened event or festival
+ The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue
between Ba and Liz about the rice cooking contest then check the T or F sentences
- Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to check the sentences
- Higher: Write a mindmap about the festival
+ Vocabulary: competition(n); fetch(v); upset(a); yell(v); urge(v); bamboo(n);
team(n); participate(v); make a fire(v); traditional(a); rub(v); separate(v); husk(n);
judge(n); award(v); council leader(n)
+ Structures : - Compound nouns: rice cooking contest
- Passive form in present perfect tense
- Reported speech
b. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the traditions of their country
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b.The new lesson

249

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Elicit game
Use the situations in the book page 121

Remark the game


Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene:
Ba and Liz are watching a famous festival
in Bac Ninh. They are asking and
answering about the things that people do
in the festival
Ask ss some questions about the festival
- How many competitions are there?
- What do they do in each competition?

Give ss the new words

Students activities

Listen carefully and answer

Observe and listen

Observe, listen and answer

1. New words
competition(n)
fetch(v)
upset(a)
yell(v)
urge(v)
bamboo(n)
team(n)
participate(v)
make a fire(v)
traditional(a)
250

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake

rub(v)
separate(v)
husk(n)
judge(n)
award(v)
council (n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Present the new structures in the dialogue


2. Structures
a) Compound nouns:
Eg:
rice - cooking festival
water fetching
fire - making contest
b) Passive form
Eg: The grand prize is awarded
c) Reported speech
Eg: The council leader said that he was pleased
to award the prize to the Thon Trieu team
Ask ss to repeat the new structures in
chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to check the
sentences
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen
Pairwork
Remark and correct
Observe and rermark
3. Check the sentences
a)F : One person
251

*Production( 5)
Ask ss to work in groups to draw a
mindmap on the board about the festival

b) T
c) T
d) F: pieces of bamboo
e) F ; the judge
f) T
Three groups draw on the board

c. Feed-back(1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write an instruction for a bad cut first aid
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 11/3/2012

Period 81

Date of teaching:
8A : 13/3/2012
8B : 13/3/2012
8C : 13/3/2012

UNIT 13 : FESTIVALS
Lesson 2 : Speak

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges
252

+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make a dialogue to prepare for
a festival
- Standard: Make a dialogue to prepare for a festival
- Higher: Write a passage about the festival
+ Vocabulary: pomegranate(n); tailor(n); tidy(v); peach blosoms(n); spring roll(n),
greeting cards(n).
+ Structures : The present perfect to ask and answer about the preparations for a
festival
b. Skills: speaking and writing skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be helpful and tidy
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

253

*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Divide the class into 2 teams and ask them
to play on the stage

Two groups play on the stage


* Networks
school festival

village festival

festiva
ls

festiva
ls

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- speaking(10)
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Present the structures to ask and answer
questions to complete the itinerary

1. New words
pomegranate(n)
tailor(n)
tidy(v)
peach blosoms(n)
spring roll(n)
greeting cards(n)
double(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
2. Structures
Eg:
- I know what to do
To V
- But I want our house to look nice at the
V
O
To V
festival
- Have you tidied the bedroom?

254

Hang the model dialogue and ask ss to


work in pairs to rearrange the sentences to
make a correct dialogue between Lan and
her Mom to prepare for Tet
Ask ss to give out their answers

Ask ss to work in pairs to make a list of


things to prepare for the school festival
Ask ss to give their ideas
Remark and correct
*While-speaking(17)
Ask ss to work in pairs to make similar
dialogues
Go around the classroom to help ss
practice
Ask students to practice in pairs before the
class
Remark and correct the mispronunciation
* Post- speaking (10)
Now ask ss to look at the suggestions in
the table and free-practice about a festival
they love or participated
Ask ss to pairwork
Ask some pairs to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Listen carefully and check

Remark correct
* Answers:
A F C H D J B G E I
Pairwork
Observe and listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen carefully and check
Remark and correct
Listen
and correct by themselves
Pairwork

Listen carefully and check


Remark and correct
Listen

c. Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(1)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the sentences in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Listen
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

255

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 12/3/2012
Date of teaching:
8A : 16/3/2012
8B : 14/3/2012
8C : 16/3/2012

UNIT 13 : FESTIVALS

Period 82

Lesson 3 : Listen
1. The aim of the lesson
a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to the dialogue and fill in
the blanks with the words they hear
- Standard: Listen and fill in the sentences and then complete the notes
- Higher: Answer some questions about the dialogue
+ Vocabulary: marigold(n); peach blossom(n); a bunch of flowers(n); dried
watermelon seed(n); spring roll(n).
+ Structures: What sort of flowers?
V follwed by an object and a to + V: need, want /Wh + to V
She is going to show me how to make spring rolls
b. Skills:
+ Listening: Listen to the dialogue and and fill in the blanks with the words they hear
+ Speaking: Ask and answer some questions about the dialogue
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love and conserve the good traditions
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask: What do you want to do?
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks

Students activities
The three groups play together
256

* Networks game
house

decorate the

Things to
prepare for Tet
buy food
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
*Pre- listening(10)
Present the new words
1. New words
marigold(n)
peach blossom(n)
a bunch of flowers(n)
dried watermelon seed(n)
spring roll(n)
Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus
Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to retell the structures of future
simple tense
Hang the picture and present the situation:
You are going to listen to the dialogue
between Liz and her parents about the
things that they are going to do to prepare
for Tet
Present the structure to talk about the
weather forecast

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
Observe and listen

2. Structures
Eg:
* What sort of flowers? = What kind of
flowers?
* V follwed by an object and a to + V:
need, want / Wh + to V
Eg:
- I want you to go to the flower market for
me, please?
- But I need Liz to do a few things
- She is going to show me how to make
spring rolls
Ask ss to guess what each person in the
257

Robinson family is going to do/ buy


Ask ss to write on the board
* While- listening (10)
Play the tape (3times)
Ask ss to give out their answers on the
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Pairwork to guess

Listen carefully
Compare with a partner

* Answers:
a) Mr. John , flower market
b) traditional
c) dried watermelon seeds
d) make
* Post- listening (10)
Ask ss to complete the notes
Ask ss to listen again to complete
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Listen and complete


Observe, listen and correct
Correct by themselves
THINGS TO DO
Mr. Robinson: go to the flower market to
buy some peach blossoms and a bunch of
marigolds
Liz: go to the market to pick up some
candies and one packet of dried
watermelon seeds
Mrs. Robinson: go to Mrs. Ngas house
to learn how to make spring rolls

c. Feed-back (3)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the instruction in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

258

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 14/3/2012

Date of teaching:
8A : 17/3/2012
8B : 16/3/2012
8C : 17/3/2012

UNIT 13 : FESTIVALS

Period 83

Lesson 4 : Read
1. The aims of the lesson
a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the
appearing origins of the Christmas specials
- Standard: Read and fill in the table and answer the questions
- Higher: Write a mindmap about the Christmas
+ Vocabulary: decorate (v); custom (n); spread (v); design (v); throughout(prep);
description (n); perform (v); suitable(a) suitable (a) ; poem (v); professor(n);
base (v) + on sth
+ Structures: - Past simple tense
- To have someone do something (passive voice)
b. Skills : Reading-comprehension skills: fill in the table and answer the questions
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love and conserve the good traditions
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
b. Students: review modal verbs, past simple and vocabulary of places
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss to answer: What did you do last year / month /week?
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5): Game: Networks
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks :
Festivals
in the year
259

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
Hang the pictures and askWhat is it?

What do you know about these?


Present some new words

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the verbs in the past
tenses

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)

Listen and answer

Listen and answer


1. New words
decorate (v)
custom (n)
spread (v)
design (v)
throughout(prep)
description (n)
perform (v)
suitable(a) suitable (a)
poem (v)
professor(n)
base (v) + on sth
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen carefully
2. New structures
260

Present the new structures

* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently
Ask ss to complete the table
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

- to have someone do(V) something


Eg: He had someone design a card
Have SO
V
STH

Read the text silently


Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
3. Complete the table
*Answers:

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to draw a
mindmap about Christmas
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Christmas
specials
Christmas tree
Christmas card

Place of origin
Riga
England

Christmas carols
Santa Claus

(no information)
USA

Date
Early 1500s
Mid-19th
century
800 years ago
1823

Pairwork
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
* Mindmap:

Riga

early
1500s
Christmas tree
Englan
d

Christmas

Christmas
card
in mid
19th

Christmas
carols

261

USA
Santa Claus

no

1823

800
years
ago

c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period : Part Write
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 18/3/2012

Period 84

Date of teaching:
8A : 20/3/2012
8B : 20/3/2012
8C : 20/3/2012

UNIT 13 : FESTIVALS
Lesson 5 : Write

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a report to tell about a
festival that they know using the model report
- Standard: Write the report using questions and the the model report
262

- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the report


+ Vocabulary: report (n); councilor(n); take(v); communal(a).
+ Structures: Structure of writing a report
Past simle tense
Passive voice
to take + a number of time
b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using questions and model report
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the report
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and know how to save the good traditions of the
nation
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 126 and ask:
What are they doing?
b. The new lesson

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Mindmap

Students activities

The three groups play together


1

* Mindmap:

Water
-fetching
Run to the
river to
take a
bottle of
water

Rice
cooking
festival
Fire- making

6
Rice
-cooking
2
Seperat
e the
husk

Rub the
bamboo
pieces

263

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a report
*Pre- writing(10)
Ask ss to look at the model report
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the report. Notice ss about
the verbs in the past.
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Observe and listen


Observe and listen
1. New words
report (n)
councilor(n)
take(v)
communal(a)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Show out the answers
* Answeers
1) rice cooking
2) one / a
3) water fetching
4) run
5) water
6) traditional
7) bamboo
8) Six
9) seperate
10) added

Ask ss to discuss groups of 4 to think


Discuss and give out their ideas
about:
- Name of the festival:
- Where the festival was
- How long lasted the festival
- How many activities there were
- How the activities were organized
- How many people took part in the festival
- What people thought about the festival
Observe and listen
Remark and giude ss to write the report
*While-writing(17)
264

Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask


others to write the report individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers
* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss some questions about the report
Remark and give out the answers

Write on the drafting paper


Remark and correct
Listen and copy
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves

c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write another passage to describe a famous festival in your village
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

+ Phng php: ..
.

Date of preparing: 19/3/2012

Period 85

Date of teaching:
8A : 23/3/2012
8B : 21/3/2012
8C : 23/3/2012

UNIT 13 : FESTIVALS
Lesson 6 : Language focus

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Past simple and present perfect in the passive form
- Compound nouns
- Reported speech
265

- Standard: Complete the sentences using the words in the box


Complete the dialogues using the verbs in the box
Complete the sentences using the compound nouns
Report the sentences
- Higher: Ask and answer some more questions
+ Vocabulary: jumble(v); pull (v); mushroom(n); bull(n); fight(v); industry(n);
export(v); plumber(n); pipe(n).
+ Structures: Progressive tenses
b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
* Passive form(12)- Exercise 1+ 2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the use and forms of past
simple and present perfect tense in the
active form

Students activities
* Matching:
Three groups play on the stage
put
write
award
hold
make
break

broken
put
held
made
written
awarded

Observe and listen

S+ V(ed) + O...
S+ has/have + V(ed) + ...
Present the form of the passive in the past

Listen and tell


266

and present perfect tense


Ask ss to look at the model sentence and
explain the aim

S+ was/were + V(ed) + O...


S+ has/have + been + V(ed) + ...

Present the new words

* New words
jumble(v)
pull (v)
mushroom(n)
bull(n)
fight(v)
industry(n)
export(v)
plumber(n)
pipe(n)

Ask ss to use the words in the box to


complete the sentences
Ask some ss to give out their answers

Do on the drafting paper

Remark and correct

Observe and listen


Listen and correct
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) were performed
2) was decorated ; put
3) was made
4) was held
5) was awarded
6) was written

Ask ss to look at the pictures and present


the aim of exercise 2
Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the
sentences
Ask some pairs to practice
Remark and correct

Pairwork
Remark and correct
2. Exercise 2.
* Keys:
a) jumbled
b) broken
c ) broken
d ) scattered
267

e ) pulled
*Compound words (10) -( Exercise 3)
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
present the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

*Reported speech (10) -( Exercise 3)


Present the situation: Yesterday lans
grandmother , Mrs. Thu needed a plumber .
A man came to her door.
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
present the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen


Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
3. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
1) Its a fire-making contest
2) Its a bull-fighting festival
3) Its a car-making industry
4) Its a flower-arranging contest
5) Its a rice-exporting country
6) Its a washing-machine

Observe and listen

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
Listen and copy
3. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
1) He said he was a plumber
2) He said he could fix the faucets
3) He said the pipes were broken
4) He said new pipes were expensive
5) He said she must pay him then

c. Feed-back (1)
268

What do we review today?


d. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Learn all vocabulary and grammar.
- Prerpare for the next period: Unit 14: Getting started + Listen and read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 21/3/2012

Period 86

Date of teaching:
8A : 24/3/2012
8B : 23/3/2012
8C : 24/3/2012

UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD


Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Ask and answer questions about famous wonders of the world
- Write to a friend to tell about a new place
+ The aims of the lesson
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue
among Hoa, Nga and Nhi about the famous place in the USA then complete the summary
- Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to complete the summary
- Higher: Ask and answer some questions about the dialogue
+ Vocabulary: clue(n); Asia(n); bored(a); explain(v); rule(n).
+ Structures : - Passive forms
- Indirect questions with if or whether
- V + to-infinitive
- Question words before to- infinitive
b. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills
269

c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beauty, the life
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b.The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game 20 questions
game: Its a job(dentist)
Listen and answer the questions from the
students
Remark the game
Give the correct answers.
*Presentation(10)
Hang the pictures set the scene:
Hoa, Nga and Nhi were bored. Hoa
suggested playing a game called 20
questions, but Nhi and Nga didnt know
how to play it. Hoa explained to them and
then they played together
Ask ss to guess who is going to win
Give ss the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present the new structures in the dialogue

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus

Students activities

Listen carefully and ask the teacher

Observe and listen

Observe, listen and answer


1. New words
clue(n)
Asia(n)
bored(a)
explain(v)
rule(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
* Question words before to - V
Eg:
I dont know how to play it
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check
270

Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in groups of 3 to practice
the dialogue
Ask 2 groups to practice the dialogue
before the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the
summary
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

*Production( 5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions about the dialogue
a) How does Hoa fell?
b) What game will they play?
c) How will the listeners answer?
d) What does the speaker give to the
listeners?
e) Who found the correct answer
finally?
Ask 5 ss to answer
Remark and correct

Correct by themselves
Listen carefully
Groupwork
Listen
Pairwork
Remark and correct
Observe and rermark
3. Complete the summary
a) game
b) place
c) clue
d) Asia
e) America
f) Golden
g) right
h) was
Pairwork

Listen and remark


* Key:
a) She is bored
b) They will play the game 20 questions
c) They only answer yes or no
d) He or she gives them a clue
e) Nhi found the correct answer finally

c. Feed-back(1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
271

- Write 20 questions for the key: Its a famous place in Viet Nam
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 25/3/2012

Period 87

Date of teaching:
8A : 27/3/2012
8B : 27/3/2012
8C : 27/3/2012

UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD


Lesson 2 : Speak

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make questions about the
famous places in the world and then report them to a partner
- Standard: Make questions and report them
- Higher: Write a passage about the places
+ Vocabulary: barrier reef(n); southern(a); heritage(n); site(n).
+ Structures: The reported speech with Yes/ No questions
b. Skills: speaking and writing skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beauty
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson

272

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Divide the class into 2 teams and ask them
to play on the stage

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
* Networks
Ha Long Bay

Big Ben

Famo
us
places

Famo
us
places

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
*Pre- speaking(10)
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Present the structures to report a question
(yes/no questions)

1. New words
barrier reef(n)
southern(a)
heritage(n)
site(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
2. Structures
Eg:
- Is Ha Long Bay in northern Viet Nam?
- Yes, it is
I asked Hoa if Ha Long Bay was in
northern Viet Nam and she said it was
- Is Phong Nha cave in northern Viet Nam?
- No, it isnt
I asked Hoa if Phong Nha cave was in
northern Viet Nam and she said it wasnt

Ask ss to write 10 or more famous places

Write on the paper


273

in the world and go around the classroom


to ask their friends
*While-speaking(17)
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
about the places
Go around the classroom to help ss practice
Ask students to practice in pairs before the
class
Ask ss to report the sentences to their
partner
Ask some pairs to practice
Remark and correct the mispronunciation
* Post- speaking (10)
Now ask ss to look at the table and freepractice about the places they would like to
go to
Ask ss to pairwork
Ask some pairs to practice
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

Pairwork
Remark correct
Pairwork
Remark correct
Pairwork
Observe and listen carefully
Listen carefully and check
Remark and correct
Listen and correct by themselves

c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss to write about the place they like most(5 sentences)
d. Homework(1)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Write the sentences in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Listen
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

274

Date of preparing: 26/3/2012

Period 88

Date of teaching:
8A : 30/3/2012
8B : 28/3/2012
8C : 30/3/2012

UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD


Lesson 3 : Listen

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to the advertisement and
find out the mistakes and correct them
- Standard: Listen and find out the mistakes and correct them
- Higher: Answer some questions about the advertisement
+ Vocabulary: jungle(n); crystal- clear(a); coral(n); snorkel(n); marine(a); coconut
palm Inn.
+ Structures: Present and future simple, modals
b. Skills:
+ Listening: Listen to the advertisement and and find out the mistakes and correct
them
+ Speaking: Ask and answer some questions about the advertisement
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask: What do you do everyday?
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Hangman

Students activities
The whole class play together
* Hangman : You watch this program to
buy something

_____________
275

Key : advertisement
Remark the game and present the new
lesson
*Pre- listening(10)
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to retell the structures of future
simple tense
Hang the picture and present the situation:
You are going to listen to the dialogue
between Mr and Mrs. Robinson. They are
looking for a place to go to on their
vacation
Expain the aim and how to correct the
advertisement
* While- listening (10)
Play the tape (3times)
Ask ss to give out their answers on the
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answers

* Post- listening (10)


Ask ss to answer some questions about the
advertisement
1) Where is the Coconut Palm Hotel?
2) Does the hotel offer guided tours?
3) Will it be dry?
4) Is the Great Barrier Reef Marine
Park a World Heritage Site?
Ask ss to listen again to answer
Ask others to remark and correct

1. New words
jungle(n)
crystal- clear(a)
coral(n)
snorkel(n)
marine(a)
coconut palm Inn
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Observe listen and answer
Observe and listen
Observe and listen
Listen carefully and find out the mistakes
Compare with a partner
* Answers:
a) souhthern = far north
b) Inn = Hotel
c) jungle = rainforest
d) 6824 = 6924
Listen and answer

Observe, listen and correct


Correct by themselves
276

Remark and give out the answers

* Key:
1) Where is the Coconut Palm Hotel?
Its right on the beach
2) Does the hotel offer guided tours?
Yes, it does
3) Will it be dry?
4) Yes, it will
5) Is the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park
a World Heritage Site?
Yes, it is

c. Feed-back (3)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the instruction in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson : Part Read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 28/3/2012

Period 89

Date of teaching:
8A : 03/4/2012
8B : 30/3/2012
8C : 03/4/2012

UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD


Lesson 4 : Read

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text
about the seven wonders of the world
- Standard: Read and complete the sentences
277

- Higher: Take a note about the 7 wonders


+ Vocabulary: compile (v); include (v); claim (v); ancient (a); honor(v); religious (a);
royal (a); ruler (n)
+ Structures: - Past simple tense
- Passive voice
b. Skills : Reading-comprehension skills: complete the sentences
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love and conserve the good traditions
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
b. Students: review modal verbs, past simple and vocabulary of places
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask 2 ss to answer: What did you do last yesterday?
b. The new lesson

Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5): Game: Networks
Ask 3 groups to play

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Networks :

Famous places in
the world
Remark the results and present the new
lesson
* Pre-reading (10)
Hang the pictures and ask
What are these?
What do you know about these?
Present some new words

Listen and answer (may be in Vietnamese)

Listen and answer


1. New words
compile (v)
include (v)
claim (v)
ancient (a)
honor(v)
religious (a)
royal (a)
278

Ask ss to repeat in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Notice ss about the verbs in the past
tenses
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently
Ask ss to complete the sentences
Ask ss to give their answers on the extra
board
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

ruler (n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen carefully

Read the text silently


Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. Complete the sentences
*Answers:
a)
b)
c)
d)

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to take a note
about the text
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

C
A
B
B

Pairwork to write
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
* Key:
- Hanging Gardens of Babylon in Iraq
- The Statue of Zesus in Greece
- The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt
- The Great Wall of China in China
- The Taj Mahal in India
- Angkor Wat in Cambodia
- The Golden Gate Brigde in San Francisco in
the USA

c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period : Part Write
279

* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy


+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 01/4/2012

Period 90

Date of teaching:
8A : 05/4/2012
8B : 03/4/2012
8C : 05/4/2012

UNIT 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD


Lesson 5 : Write

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a letter to tell about a trip
somewhere using the model letter
- Standard: Write the letter using the model letter and the prompts
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the letter
+ Vocabulary: although (prep); form(v); quite(adv); level(n); lead(v); hike(n); edge(n);
inhabitant(n).
+ Structures: Structure of a letter
Past simle tense
to lead someone to somewhere
b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using prompts and model letter
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the letter
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beauty
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(5)
Ask ss to look at the picture on page 133 and ask:
What do you know about this place?
280

b. The new lesson


Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Students activities

The three groups play together


spend
return
be
talk
do
take

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a letter
*Pre- writing(10)
Ask ss to look at the model letter
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Ask ss to read the letter and insert the
letter of the missing sentences. Notice ss
about the verbs in the past.
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Ask ss to discuss groups of 4 to think

talked
took
did
spent
was/were
returned

Observe and listen


Observe and listen
1. New words
although (prep)
form(v)
quite(adv)
level(n)
lead(v)
hike(n)
edge(n)
inhabitant(n)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Read silently
Show out the answers
* Answers
1) C
2) B
3) D
4) A
Discuss and give out their ideas
281

about:
- Name of the place: Cuc Phuong
National Park, Phong Nha cave, Ha Long
Bay
- Distance from the city/ home: 100km/
200km/ 12 hours by train/ by bus/ by
coach
- How to get there: by train/ by bus/ by
coach
- Sights: beautiful, magnificent,
breathtaking
- Weather: temperature, sunny, cool,
windy
- How you feel: happy, excited, relaxed
Remark and giude ss to write the letter
Ask ss to use the model letter and the
ideas thaye have discussed to write the
letter
*While-writing(17)
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the letter individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers
* Post-writing (5)
Ask ss some questions about the letter
1) What did you visit?
2) How far was it from your house?
3) How did you get there?
4) What was the weather like?
5) How did you feel?
Ask 5 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen

Write on the drafting paper


Remark and correct
Listen and copy
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
Pairwork

Listen and and answer


Remark and correct

c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write another passage to describe a famous place in your country
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy

282

+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 02/4/2012

Period 91

Date of teaching:
8A : 06/4/2012
8B : 04/4/2012
8C : 07/4/2012

UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD


Lesson 6 : Language focus

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- The passive forms: in the past simple tense
- Indirect questions with if and whether
- Question-words before to-infinitives
- Verb + to infinitive
- Standard: Complete the sentences using the passive forms of the verbs in the box
Report the questions Nhi asked Nga
Complete the Nhis questions using the question-words+ to infinitive
Complete the passage using to infinitives or bare-infinitives
- Higher: Ask and answer some more questions
+ Vocabulary: construct(v); present (v); decide(v); shelter(n); complete(a); second(n).
+ Structures: To-infinitive or bare infinitive
Reported questions
Passive forms
b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson

283

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Students activities
* Matching:
Three groups play on the stage
V
ask
tell
complete
think
may
design

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
* Passive form(7)- Exercise 1
Introduce the first content of the lesson
through the extra board
Ask ss to retell the use and forms of past
simple tense in the active form

VP1
asked
told
completed
thought
might
designed

VP2
asked
told
completed
thought
designed

Observe and listen

Listen and tell


S+ V(ed) + O...

Ask ss to retell the form of the passive in


the past tense
Ask ss to look at the model sentence and
explain the aim
Present the new words

Ask ss to use the words in the box to


complete the sentences
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

S+ was/were + V(ed) +
Eg: Sydney Opera House was completed in
1973
* New words
construct(v)
present (v)
decide(v)
shelter(n)
complete(a)
second(n)
Do on the drafting paper
Observe and listen
Listen and correct
284

1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) was completed
2) was constructed
3) was designed
4) was presented
5) was reached
*Indirect questions (10) -( Exercise 2)
Ask ss to look at the model sentences in
part 2 and present the aim of exercise 2:
report the questions that Nga and Nhi
talked about My Son
Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the
sentences
Ask some pairs to practice
Remark and correct

*Question words before to - infinitives


(10) -( Exercise 3)
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
present the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen

Pairwork
Remark and correct
2. Exercise 2.
* Keys:
a) Nhi asked Nga if it was far from Ha Noi
b) Nhi asked Nga if My Son was in Quang
Nam province
c ) Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at
My Son
d ) Nhi asked Nga if many tourists visited
my Son every year
e ) Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to visit My
Son one day
Observe and listen
Observe and listen
Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
3. Exercise 3.
* Keys:
1) Nga told Nhi how to get there
2) Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets
3) Nga pointed out to Nhi where to buy
285

souvenirs
4) Nga advised Nhi where to go from My
Son to Hoi An
5) Nga told Nhi what to do there during
the visit
*to infi or bare -infi (10) -( Exercise
4)
Present the aim and ask ss to look at the
model sentences and present the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to write on the board
Ask ss to correct
Remark and give out the answers

Observe and listen


Do on the drafting paper
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
4. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
0) to go
1) to jog
2) go
3) to gather
4) to rain
5) to reach
6) to continue
7) get

c. Feed-back (1)
What do we review today?
d. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Learn all vocabulary and grammar.
- Prerpare for the next period: Unit 15: Getting started + Listen and read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.

286

+ Phng php: ..
.

287

Date of preparing: 04/4/2012

Date of teaching:
8A : 10/4/2012
8B : 06/4/2012
8C : 10/4/2012

REVISION

Period 92

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary from Unit 12 to Unit 14
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme recreation and the world around us
+ Structures:
- Past progressive tense
- Connectors: while and when
- Reported questions with if or whether
- Question words followed by an infinitive
- Compound words
- Verb + to infinitive
- Passive forms in the past simple
b. Skills: 4 skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, exercises
b. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary from unit 12-14
3. The stages of the lesson
a.The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (2)
Say hello to the students
How are you?
Today were going to review the main
grammar points and vocabulary from unit
12 to unit 14
* Review(30)
Ask ss to retell the use, forms of past
progressive tense
Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss

Students activities

Listen and answer

Listen and retell

288

discuss to make examples


Remark and correct

Three groups make and show out their


sentences
1. Past progressive tense
Eg: She was cooking at 7 last night
She was cooking when I came
While she was reading, the phone rang

Ask the class to retell the use and the Listen and tell
forms of reported questions and make 2
2. Reported speech with if or whether
examples on the board
Eg:
Remark and correct
Are you a student? She asked me
She asked me if/ whether I was a student
Do you like playing marbles?
She asked me if/ whether I liked playing
marbles
Listen and retell
Ask the class to retell the forms of the
passive verbs and make 3 examples on the
board
3. Passive forms in past simple
Remark and correct
Eg: I cut down the trees this morning
The trees were cut down this morning
She painted the house last week
The house was painted last week
Ask the class to retell the use, form of
question words or verbs followed by an
infinitive and make 2 examples on the
board
Remark and correct

Listen and retell

4. Question words or verbs followed by an


infinitive
Eg:
He decided to go out last night
Ask the class to retell the use, form of
mindand make 2 examples on the board He told his roommate what to do
Remark and correct
Ask the class to retell the use of
compound words
Ask ss to make 2 examples on the board
Remark and correct

Listen and answer


5. Compound words
Eg: a rice -cooking contest
289

a water- fetching contest


a flower- arranging contest
* Feed-back(3)
Ask ss to tell the main grammar points Listen and answer
that thay have to review

c. Homework (2)
Review from unit 12 to unit 14 to prepare for the next lesson: Test 45 minutes
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 08/4/2012

Period 93

Date of teaching:
8A : 12/4/2012
8B : 10/4/2012
8C : 12/4/2012

TEST
Time: 45 minutes

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary from Unit 12 to Unit 14
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme recreation and the world around us
+ Structures:
- Past progressive tense
- Connectors: while and when
- Reported questions with if or whether
- Question words followed by an infinitive
- Compound words
- Verb + to infinitive
- Passive forms in the past simple
290

b. Skills: 3 skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2. Matrix

Tn
Ch

Listening

Nhn bit
TNKQ

Thng hiu
TL

TNKQ

Vn dng
TL

TL

A vacation
abroad
(Fill in the
blanks )
6 cu x 0.25
= 1,5
Festivals
(Fill in the
blanks )
5 cu x
0,5=2,5

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

A vacation
abroad,
Festivals and
wonders
(Multiple
choice)
4 cu x 0,5 =
2,0

Vocabulary

4 cu
2= 20%

A vacation
abroad,
Festivals and
wonders
(Multiple
choice)
5 cu x 0.5 =
2,5

Grammar

Writing

6 cu
1,5 im=
15%

Cng

6 cu
1,5 =
15%

Reading

S cu
S im

TN
KQ

4 cu
2,0 im=20%

10 cu
5,0 im=
50%

5 cu
2,5 =
25%

A vacation
abroad,
Rearrange
the words )
6 cu x 0,25
= 1,5
6 cu
1,5 im=
15%

6 cu
1,5 =
15%
26 cu
100%

291

3. Preparations
a.Teacher: Photo the tests: 101 sheets
b. Students: review from unit 12 to unit 14, drafting paper.
* Questions

I. Nghe on vn v in thng tin cn thiu vo ch trng( 1,5 points)


Stt
1
2
3
4
5
6

City

Temperature
Low
High
12
16
18
22
25
14
24
15
19

Weather

Son La
Hai Phong
Hue
Nha Trang
Ho Chi Minh city
Ha Noi

windy
hot
hot
cool
hot

sunny
cloudy
sunny
cloudy

II. c on vn sau v in t thch hp trong bng vo ch trng(2,5 points)


were
flowers

arrange
was

attractively
class

held
won

hours
and

The flower- arranging contest was(1) .. in our school yard last week..
There(2) two competitions: flower- arranging(3)..commenting
contest. . The contest took) four(4).
In the flower- arranging contest, two or three students from each team had to (5)
flowers as(6)..as they could.
In the commenting-contest, one student had to talk about the topic, the meaning of the (7)
. they arranged.
After the contest, all the poits were added and(8). 8D (9) the
first prize. The festival (10) wonderful.
III. Khoanh trn vo t ph hp v ngha hon thnh cc cu sau (2,0 points)
1. ....is an important festival. It is held on the 24th December Eve every
year.
a. Tet
b. Christmas
c. Mid- Fall Festival d. New Years Day
2. An English speakingwas held at my school last week
292

a. festival
b. competition
c. participation
d. contest
3. The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt is one of the seven ..of the world
a. wonders
b. heritages
c. religions
d. capitals
4. I will .you up at the bus stop
a. take
b. wait
c. pick
d. catch
IV. Khoanh trn vo p n ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2,5 points)
1. When I came, hea book
a. is reading
b. was reading
c. reading
d. read
2. Hoa doesnt know how.the lock
a. open
b. opened
c. to open
d. opening
3. They decided swimming last week
a. to go
b. go
c. went
d. going
4. She asked me if far from school
a. it is
b. it was
c. was it
d. is it
5. The car ..yesterday
a. is washed
b. were washed
c. are washed
d. was washed
V. Sp xp cc t sau theo ng th t to thnh cu c ngha (1,5 points)
1. Ngas family / Cuc Phuong / visited / last week.
2. was / Hanoi / far from / 25 km / It.
3. Nga / her family / and / there / by bus/ went.
4. The sights / beautiful / were / and / peaceful.
5. cool and cloudy/ was / It.
6. felt / Nga / relaxed/ very/ the visit / after.
* Answer keys
I. Nghe on vn v in thng tin cn thiu vo ch trng( 1,5 points)
5 x 0,3 = 1,5 points
City
Temperature
Stt
Weather
Low
High
1 Son La
cold
windy
12
16
2 Hai Phong
warm
cloudy
15
20
3 Hue
hot
sunny
24
28
4 Nha Trang
cool
cloudy
14
17
293

5
6

Ho Chi Minh city


Ha Noi

hot
warm

sunny
cloudy

26
15

29
19

Tapetranscript:
This is the weather forecast for tomorrow
1.Son La will be cold and windy. For the temperature, the low will be twelve and the
high will be sixteen
2. Hai Phong will be warm and cloudy. For the temperature, the low will be fifteen and
the high will be twenty.
3. Hue will be hot and sunny. For the temperature, the low will be twenty four and the
high will be twenty eight.
4. Nha Trang will be cool and cloudy. For the temperature, the low will be fourteen and
the high will be seventeen.
5. Ho Chi Minh city will be hot and sunny. For the temperature, the low will be twenty
six and the high will be twenty nine.
6. Ha Noi will be warm and cloudy. For the temperature, the low will be fifteen and the
high will be nineteen.
II. c on vn sau v in t thch hp trong bng vo ch trng(2,5 points)
10 x 0,25 = 2,5 (points)
1. held
2. were
3. and
4. hours 5. arrange
6. attractively
7. flowers
8. class
9. won
10. was
III. Khoanh trn vo t ph hp v ngha hon thnh cc cu sau (2,0 points)
4 x 0,5 = 2,0 points
1. b
2. d
3. a
4. c
IV. Khoanh trn vo p n ng hon thnh cc cu sau (2,5 points)
5 x 0,5 = 2,5 points
1. b
2. c
3. a
4. b
5. b
V. Sp xp cc t, cm t sau theo ng th t to thnh cu c ngha (1,5
points)
6 x 0,25 = 1,5 points
1. Ngas family visited Cuc Phuong last week.
2. It was 25 km far from Hanoi
3. Nga and her family went and there by bus.
4. The sights were beautiful and peaceful.
5. It was cool and cloudy
6. Nga felt very relaxed after the visit.
4. Homework (1)
294

- Do the test again in the book


- Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 15: Getting started + Listen and read.
* Nhn xt sau tit kim tra
+ Vic nm kin thc ca hc sinh:
.....
.

+ K nng vn dng ca hc
sinh: .......................................................................................................................................
...............................................................
.
+ Vic trnh by ca hc sinh:
.....

Date of preparing: 09/4/2012


Date of teaching:
8A : 13/4/2012
8B : 11/4/2012
8C : 14/4/2012
Period 94

CORRECTING THE TEST

1.The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have their tests checked and correct the
tests by themselves
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme recreation and the world around us
+ Structures:
- Past progressive tense
- Connectors: while and when
- Reported questions with if or whether
- Question words followed by an infinitive
- Compound words
- Verb + to infinitive
- Passive forms in the past simple
b. Skills: 3 skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2. Preparations
a.Teacher give points to the tests
b. Students: review from unit 12 to unit 14.
3. The stages of the lesson
a.The old lesson check- up(1)
Check ss preparations
295

b.The new lesson


Teachers activities
* Pre-correcting (10)
Give the tests to ss
Remark the tests generally through the main
mistakes in each part of the test
* While- correcting(30)
Go through each part of the test, ask ss to
point out the correct answer of each
sentence, and explain why

Students activities

Get and observe


Observe and listen carefully
Look at each part of the test, point out the
correct answer of each sentence, and
explain why

I. Nghe on vn v in thng tin cn


thiu vo ch trng( 1,5 points): 6 x
0,25 = 1,5 points
1. cold
2. cloudy
3. 24
4. 17
5. 26
6. warm
II. c on vn sau v in t thch
hp trong bng vo ch trng(2,5
points):
10 x 0,25 = 2,5 (points)
1. held 2. were 3. and 4. hours 5. arrange
6. attractively 7. flowers 8. class 9. won
10. was
III. Khoanh trn vo t ph hp v
ngha hon thnh cc cu sau (2,0
points): 4 x 0,5 = 2,0 points
1. b
2. d
3. a
4. c
IV. Khoanh trn vo p n ng
hon thnh cc cu sau (2,5 points):
5 x 0,5 = 2,5 points
1. b
2. c
3. a
4. b
5. b
V. Sp xp cc t, cm t sau theo ng
th t to thnh cu c ngha (1,5
points): 6 x 0,25 = 1,5 points
296

* Post-correcting( 2)
Ask ss to tell what they could and could not
do in the test and know the way to improve
the knowledge in the next test
did badly in the test.

1. Ngas family visited Cuc Phuong


last week.
2. It was 25 km far from Hanoi
3. Nga and her family went and there by
bus.
4. The sights were beautiful and
peaceful.
5. It was cool and cloudy
6. Nga felt very relaxed after the visit.
Listen and tell out
Listen and remember

c. Feed- back(1)
Remind the things that ss did well and badly
d. Homework (1)
- Do the test again in the book
- Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 15: Getting started + Listen and read
Date of preparing: 11/4/2012

Period 95

Date of teaching:
8A : 17/4/2012
8B : 13/4/2012
8C : 17/4/2012

UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS
Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims of the whole unit :
By the end of the unit, ss will be able to:
- Express their opinions
- Write a guide of using a printer
+ The aims of the lesson: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a
dialogue and check the sentences
- Standard: Practice the dialogue and check the sentences
- Higher: Ask and answer questions about the dialogue
- Vocabulary: plug(n; v); socket(n); guarantee (n;v); manual(n)
.
- Structures : - Present perfect and past simple
- Present perfect with already and yet
297

b. Skills:

- Give and respond to the opinions


- Listening-comprehension about papermaking
- Read and understand about a university without a library
- Write a guide of using a printer using the pictures and the given words
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and know the advantages of computer and keep
away from its disadvantages.
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Networks
Remark the game
Give the correct answers.

Students activities
Two groups play on the stage
Ha Long
Advatages
of computer

entertain

*Presentation(10)
Hang the picture set the scene: Nams father
Observe and listen carefully
has bought a new set of computer in HCM
city. Now Nam is printing and there is a
problem with the new printer
Give ss the new words
1. New words
plug(n; v)
socket(n)
guarantee (n;v)
manual(n))
298

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Present the new structures in the dialogue

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* Practice (20)
Play the tape ( 3times)
Ask ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue
Ask 2 pairs to practice the dialogue before
the class
Remark and correct
Ask ss to work in pairs to check the
sentences
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

* Production( 5)
Ask ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions using the information from
the dialogue
Ask ss to answer
Remark and correct the mistake then give
out the answer key

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
2. Structures
Present perfect with already and yet
Eg:
- Have you turned it on yet?
- I have already done it
Repeat the new structures in chorus
Listen and check

Listen carefully
Pairwork
Listen carefully
Pairwork
Remark and correct
Observe and rermark
3. Check the sentences: Fact or Opinion
a) F
b) O
c) F
d) O
e) F
f) O

Pairwork

Listen and answer


4. Answer the questions
* Answers:
a) Where did Mr. Nhat buy the computer?
299

He bought it in HCM city


b)Is the printer working?
No, it isnt
c) Has Nam turned it on yet?
Yes, he has
d) Does Nam know how to connect a
printer?
Yes, he does
e) Has the plug come out of the sockett?
No, it hasnt
f)What are they going to do?
They are going to call the store
c. Feed-back(1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework (3)
- Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart
- Write a short passage about computers
- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next lesson Speak + Listen
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 09/4/2012

Period 96

Date of teaching:
8A : 19/4/2012
8B : 17/4/2012
8C : 19/4/2012

UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS
Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen

1. The aim of the lesson


300

a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Give and respond to the opinions
- Listen to a text about how to make paper and fill in the gaps with the
words and rearrange the sentences
- Standard: Give and respond to the opinions
Listen to a text about how to make paper and and rearrange the sentences
- Higher: fill in the gaps with the words
+ Vocabulary: challenging(a); tim-consuming(a); process(n). procedure(n); pulp
vat(n); drain(v); fiber(n); smoothe(v); convey(v).
+ Structures: I like/ dislike
I agree/ disagree
On the other hand,
b. Skills:
+ Speaking: Give and respond to the opinions
+ Listening: Listen to a text about how to make paper and fill in the gaps with the
words and rearrange the sentences
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love their country, native land
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

*Warm-up(4)
Ask ss to play the game "Take a survey" * Take a survey:
S1: How much is a/an?
S2: Itsdong (They are dong)
*Pre- speaking(7)
Introduce the aim through the picture
Ask ss to look at the model dialogue
Present the new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read

Observe and listen carefully


1. New words
challenging(a)
tim-consuming(a)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
301

Remark and correct the mistake


Present the new structures to ask and
answer about giving the instructions

2. Structures
Opinions
I like
I dont like
I think
I feel
I dont believe

Ask ss to repeat the new structures in


chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
Ask ss to look at the tables and present
the aim
Make some examples on the board

*While-speaking(15)
Ask ss work in pairs to make similar
dialogues with the partner
Ask 4 pairs to practice
Remark and give out the correct
answers
* Pre-listening (5)
Hang the pictures and present the aim
Give some new words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in


chorus

Agreement
So do I
I agree
Neither do I

Dis agreement
I disagree
I cant agree
with you
No, I think

Repeat the new structures in chorus


Listen and check
Correct by themselves
Observe and listen
* Eg:
1) I think playing in the rain is dangerous
- I agree
2) I like driving a car
- No, disagree because its challenging
Pairwork
Observe, listen and remark
Observe and listen carefully
3. Listen
* New words:
process(n)
procedure(n)
pulp vat(n)
drain(v)
fiber(n)
smoothe(v)
convey(v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and check
Correct by themselves
302

Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
*While-listening (8)
Play the tape (3times)
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct
answers

Listen carefully
Listen again and check the sentences
* Answers: a) simple ; b) same ; c) two
hundred ; d) left ; e) rollers
Pairwork and rearrange
Listen and give out the answers

* Post-listening (2)
Ask ss to rearrange the sentences
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark
Remark and give out the correct
answers

* Answers: c, d, a, e, g, f, b.

c. Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words and the new structures by heart
- Make dialogues about part Speak
- Prepare for the next lesson Read
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 16/4/2012
Date of teaching:
8A : 27/4/2012
8B : 18/4/2012
8C : 27/4/2012
Period 97

UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS
303

Lesson 3 : Read
1. The aim of the lesson
a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text
about a university without a library
- Standard: Read and check the boxes (exercise 1)
- Higher: Answer some questions (exercise 2)
+ Vocabulary: message (n); store (v); access (n); freshman (n); restrict (v); bulletin
(n); degree (n); skeptical(a); concern(v)
+ Structures: Present simple
b. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and answer the questions (exercise 2) and
check the sentences (exercise 1)
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards
b. Students: review present simple and vocabulary of library and computers
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up( 3)
Ask 2: What do you do on the weekend?
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (5) Game: Networks

Students activities
The whole class play together play on the stage

Famous
universities in
VN

Remark the results and present the new


lesson
* Pre-reading (12)
Present some new words

1. New words
message (n)
store (v)
access (n)
freshman (n)
restrict (v)
bulletin (n)
degree (n)
skeptical(a)
304

concern(v)
Ask ss to repeat in chorus
Ask 2 ss to read
Remark and correct the mistake
* While-reading(17)
Ask ss to read the text silently
Ask ss to check the sentences
Ask ss to give out their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

* Post-reading (5)
Ask ss to read the text silently again read
and answer the questions
Ask ss to read their answers
Ask others to remark and correct
Remark and give out the answer key

Repeat the new words in chorus


Listen and correct by themselves

Read the text silently


Use the information in the text to check
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
2. Check the boxes
* Answers:
1) T
2) T
3) T
4) F
5) T
6) T
Pairwork
Listen and answer
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
3. Answer the questions
a) It has no library. All information normally
found ina library is now stored in the
universitys computres
b) All information normally found ina library or
messages normally found on a bulletin board
c) a computer and a telephone line
d) With a bulletin board on the Internet, a great
number of people can get access to the bulletin
and exchange information quickly
e)Students answers

c. Feed-back (1)
What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points.
305

- Write 5 sentences about the computers


- Do exercises in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period: Part Write
*Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 17/4/2012

Period 98

Date of teaching:
8A : 20/4/2012
8B : 20/4/2012
8C : 20/4/2012

REVISION THE SECOND SEMESTER

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme personal information
+ Structures :
- Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and
promises
- in order to / so as to
- Passive forms in commands and future simple
- Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause
- mind to make requests
- ed and ing participles
b. Skills: 4 skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, exercises
b. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary
306

3. The stages of the lesson


a.The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities

Students activities

* Warm-up (2)
Listen and answer
Say hello to the students
How are you?
Today were going to review the main
grammar points and vocabulary from unit
9 to unit 11
* Review(30)
Ask ss to retell the use, forms of future Listen and retell
simple
1. Make requests with will
Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss Three groups make and show out their
sentences
discuss to make examples
Remark and correct
Ask the class to retell the use of in order
to / so as to and make 2 examples on the
2. in order to / so as to
board
Eg:
Remark and correct
She goes to the market to/ so as to/ in order to
buy some flowers
Ask the class to retell the forms of the
passive verbs and make 3 examples on the 3. Passive forms in commands and future
simple
board
Eg: Glass is broken into small pieces
Remark and correct
Trees are cut down
The house will be paiinted
Ask the class to retell the use, form of
adjectives followed by an infinitive or a
noun clause and make 2 examples on the
board
Remark and correct

4. Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a


noun clause
Eg: It is easy to learn English
He is happy that she is fine

Ask the class to retell the use, form of


mindand make 2 examples on the board 5. mind to make requests
Remark and correct
- Do/ Would you mind if I V/ VP1?
307

- Would/ Do you mind + V(ing)?


Eg:
- Do/ Would you mind opening the window?
- Not at all
- Do you mind if I sit here?
- Please do
Or - Would you mind if I sat here?
- Please do
Ask the class to retell the use of
- ed and ing participles
Ask ss to make 2 examples on the board
Remark and correct

6. ed and ing participles


Listen and answer
Eg: The boy reading a book is Ba
The doll made in China is 5 dollars

* Feed-back(3)
Listen and answer
Ask ss to tell the main grammar points
that thay have to review

c. Homework (2)
Review to prepare for the next lesson: Revision(cont)
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 22/4/2012

Date of teaching:
8A : 24/4/2012
8B : 24/4/2012
8C : 24/4/2012
308

Period 99

REVISION THE SECOND SEMESTER(cont)

1. The aims of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points
and vocabulary
+ Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme recreation and the world around us
+ Structures:
- Past progressive tense
- Connectors: while and when
- Reported questions with if or whether
- Question words followed by an infinitive
- Compound words
- Verb + to infinitive
- Passive forms in the past simple
b. Skills: 4 skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, exercises
b. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary
3. The stages of the lesson
a.The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
* Warm-up (2)
Say hello to the students
How are you?
Today were going to review the main
grammar points and vocabulary
* Review(30)
Ask ss to retell the use, forms of past
progressive tense
Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss
discuss to make examples
Remark and correct

Students activities

Listen and answer

Listen and retell


Three groups make and show out their
sentences
1. Past progressive tense
309

Eg: She was cooking at 7 last night


She was cooking when I came
While she was reading, the phone rang

Ask the class to retell the use and the


forms of reported questions and make 2 Listen and tell
examples on the board
Remark and correct
2. Reported speech with if or whether
Eg:
Are you a student? She asked me
She asked me if/ whether I was a student
Do you like playing marbles?
She asked me if/ whether I liked playing
marbles
Ask the class to retell the forms of the
passive verbs and make 3 examples on the Listen and retell
board
Remark and correct
3. Passive forms in past simple
Eg: I cut down the trees this morning
The trees were cut down this morning
She painted the house last week
The house was painted last week
Ask the class to retell the use, form of
question words or verbs followed by an
Listen and retell
infinitive and make 2 examples on the
board
Remark and correct
4. Question words or verbs followed by an
infinitive
Ask the class to retell the use, form of
Eg:
mindand make 2 examples on the board He decided to go out last night
He told his roommate what to do
Remark and correct
Ask the class to retell the use of
compound words
Ask ss to make 2 examples on the board
Remark and correct

Listen and answer


5. Compound words
Eg: a rice -cooking contest
a water- fetching contest
a flower- arranging contest
310

c. Feed-back(3)
Ask ss to tell the main grammar points that thay have to review
d. Homework (2)
Review to prepare for the second term test(45 minutes)
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 19/4/2012
Date of teaching:
8A : 26/4/2012
8B : 26/4/2012
8C : 26/4/2012
Period 100
THE SECOND TERM TEST
Time : 45 minutes
1.The aims of the lesson
a. Knowledges: Check ss knowledges, vocabulary and structures for the whole school
year.
- Vocabulary: review all vocabulary
- Structures: all the tenses and structures
b.Skills: reading, vocabulary, grammar and writing .
c.Education : Educate students to be truthful
2. Preparations
a.Teacher: photo the tests
b. Students: review well.
3. Matrix
Tn
Ch

Vocabulary
and
Grammar

Nhn bit
TNKQ

(Multiple
choice)
12 cu x
0.25
= 3,0

TL

Thng hiu
TNKQ

TL

Vn dng
TNKQ

TL

(Wordfilling)
4 cu x
0.25
= 1,0

(Verbdivision)
6 cu x 0.25
= 1,5

Cng

22cu
5,5 =
55%

311

Reading

12cu
3,0 =
30%

(Rearran
ge
the
words )
6 cu x
0,25 =
1,5

Writing

S cu
S im

(Answer the
questions)
4 cu x 0,25
=1,0

(Matching )
8 cu x
0,25=2,0

12 cu
3,0 im
= 30%

6 cu
1,5
= 15%

6cu
1,5 =
15%

8 cu
2,0 im
= 20%

4 cu
1,0 im
= 10%

10 cu
2,5 im
= 25%

40 cu
10 =
100%

I. Em hy khoanh trn vo p n ng a, b, c, hoc d (3 im)


1. Hoa is not.to be in my class
a. old
b. old enough
c. enough old
d. enough
2. The Earth ..around the sun
a. go
b. going
c. went
d. goes
3. I do my homework every day
a. herself
b. himself
c. myself
d. itself
4. She .in the country
a. used to live
b. use to live
c. used live
d. used to lived
5. She doesnt usually go to work Sunday
a. in
b. at
c. on
d. for
6. Can you go to the store for me, please? My mom ...to the store for her
a. asked me to go
b. ask me to go
c.asked me go
d. ask me go
7. Nam likes soccer very much
a. played
b. playing
c. plays
d. play
8. They have lived here ..five years
a. in
b. since
c. for
d. at
9. She asked me if My Son ..in Quang Nam
a. is
b. was
c. were
d. are
10. Nga .. in Ha Noi 5 years ago
a. live
b. to live
c. lived
d. lives
11. When I came, she..dinner
a. were cooking
b. is cooking
c. cooking
d. was cooking
12. The house every day
a. is clean
b. is cleaned
c. is cleaning
d. cleans
II. Chn t trong bng in vo ch trng trong cc cu sau (1im)
312

always
wonders
broken
mind
1. Do you ................................................if I sit here?
2. Hung is .............................................playing games at night
3. The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt was one of the sevenof the world
4. The glass has already been .
III. Chia ng t trong ngoc n dng ng hon thnh cc cu sau (1,5 im)
1. Could you .............................................(help) me?
2. Oanh .........................................................................( live) in Mai Son sine 1995
3. I decided ..(go) to Ha Long Bay
4. They (eat)...chicken yesterday
5. Trang said she (have) a lot of books
6. Will you .(open) the window, please, Thu?
IV. c on vn sau:
Christmas is the most famous festival in England. It is held on December 24 th Eve every
year. People have to prepare a lot of things before the festival. They have to buy many
things such as a Christmas tree, Christmas cards, flowers, and candy. People also have a
lot of activities, for example they have to decorate the tree, send cards to their relatives
and friends, make some kinds of cakes.On Christmas Eve, people gather at the church
and sing Christmas carols. At late night, the Santa Claus, who is in red, climbs through
the chimney of houses and give presents to the children. The next morning, when the
children get up, they will enjoy their presents. Christmas is really wonderful.
1) Ni cc cu ct A vi cc cu ct B cho ng (2 im)
A
B
1. Christmas is the most famous festival in
a. the festival
2. Christmas is held
b. sung on Christmas Eve
3. People have to prepare a lot of things before
c. England
4. Christmas carols are
d. a red suit
5. Santa Claus always wears ...
e. the next morning
6. Santa Claus doesnt go into houses
f. wonderful
7. Children get up and receive their presents
g. on December 24th every year
8. Christmas is really
h. through the front door
* Answer key
1.
3.
5.
7.
2.
4.
6.
8.
2. Tr li cc cu hi sau(1 im)
a. When is Christmas held in England every year ?
..
b. Do people decorate Christmas tree?
...
c. What do people do at the church on On Christmas Eve?
,,

313

d. Does Santa Claus climb through the chimney of houses to give children presents?
,,,
V. Sp xp cc t sau theo ng trt t to thnh cu c ngha (1,5 im)
1. is / It / cooking / contest / a / rice.
..
2. you / yet / finished / have / your homework?
..
3. already / Nam / it / done / has.
...
4. will / It /cold / and / windy / be / tomorrow.
..
5. you / if / I / Would / smoked / mind?
..
6. The red pen / expensive / than / more / is / the blue one.
..

P N V BIU IM
I. 12 x 0,25= 3,0 im.
1. b
2. d
3. c
4. a
5. c
6. a
II. 4x 0,25 = 1 im
1. mind
2. always
3. wonders
4. broken
III. 6x 0,25= 1,5 im
1. help ;
2. has lived ;
IV.
Cu 1: 8x 0,25 = 2 im
1. c
2. g
3. a
4. b
5. d
6. h

7. b
8. c
9. b
10. c
11. d
12. b

3. to go ;

4. ate ;

5. had ;

6. open

314

7. e
8. f
Cu 2: 4 x 0,25 = 1 im
a. It is held on December 24th Eve every year
b. Yes, they do
c. On Christmas Eve, people gather at the church and sing Christmas carols
d. Yes, he does
V. 6x 0,25= 1,5 im
1. It is a rice-cooking contest.
2. Have you finished your homework yet?
3. Nam has already done it.
4. It will be cold and windy tomorrow.
5. Would you mind if I smoked?
6. The red pen is more expensive than the blue one.

Date of preparing: 25/4/2012

Period 101

Date of teaching:
8A : 27/4/2012
8B : 27/4/2012
8C : 27/4/2012

UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS
Lesson 4 : Write

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write an instruction on how to
use a printer using the pictures and the given words
- Standard: write the instruction using the pictures and the given words
- Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the instruction
+ Vocabulary: flash (v); screen(n); power(n); removev); load(v); input tray (n); click(v)
+ Structures: Format of an instruction
b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using a model instruction
- Speaking skills: ask and answer about the instruction
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and self- learn
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper
3. The stages of the lesson
315

a. The old lesson check-up(5)


Ask ss to answer
What did you do yesterday/ last week?
b. The new lesson
Teachers activities
*Warm-up(5)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Remark the game and ask


Today we are going to write a instruction
on how to use a printer
*Pre- writing(10)
Give ss some necessary words

Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus


Ask 3 ss to read and correct the mistake
Present the situation of the instruction
Ask ss to read the woeds and look at the
pictures and talk about the instruction
Ask ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct
Ask ss to look at the pictures and talk
about the whole instruction
Ask ss to remember the pictures
imperatives used to make instructions
*While-writing(17)
Ask ss to to write their instruction on
drafting paper
Ask 2 ss to write on the board and ask
others to write the story individually
Ask others to remark and correct the two
writings on the board
Remark and give out the answers

Students activities
Three groups play on the stage
* Matching
1) be get try move rain
2) rained was/were tried moved got
Observe and listen
1. New words
flash (v)
screen(n)
power(n)
removev)
load(v)
input tray (n)
click(v)
Repeat the new words in chorus
Listen and correct by themselves
Listen carefully
Read silently an talk about it
Show out the answers

The others write on the drafting paper


Observe and remark
Listen and copy
*Suggested writing:
316

Plug in the printer and turn on the power


Remove the old paper and load the new
paper in the paper input tray
Wait for the power button to flash
Have the pages appear on the computer
screen
Click the printer icon on the screen and
wait for a few seconds
The printed paper will come out of the
output tray path in a minute
* Post-writing (5)
Hang the extra board and ask ss to ask and Pairwork and answer
answer about the instruction
1) What do have to do at first?
2) How do we load the new paper?
3) Do the pages appear on the computer
screen after the button flashes ?
4) How long will the printed paper
come out of the output path?
Ask ss to answer
Remark and give out the answers
Observe and correct
Correct by themselves
* Answers:
1) We have to plug in the printer and turn
on the power
2) We remove the old paper and load the
new paper in the paper input tray
3) Yes, they do
4) The printed paper will come out of the
output path in a minute
c. Feed-back (1)
Ask ss to tell the main content of the lesson
d. Homework(2)
- Learn the new words by heart
- Write the instruction again in the notebook
- Prepare for the next lesson Language focus
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy

317

+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.
Date of preparing: 29/4/2012

Period 102

Date of teaching:
8A : 03/5/2012
8B : 02/5/2012
8C : 03/5/2012

UNIT 15 : COMPUTERS
Lesson 5 : Language focus

1. The aim of the lesson


a. Knowledges:
+ The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review:
- Present perfect with yet and already
- Comparison of present perfect with past simple
- Standard: Complete the dialogue using the present perfect with yet and already
Ask and answer the questions about the flights using yet and already
Complete the table by recognize the tenses and then complete the
dialogues
- Higher: Do some more exercises
+ Vocabulary: through(prep); unplug(v); recently(adv)
+ Structures: - Present perfect with past simple
b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills
c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard be friendly
2. Preparations
a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards
b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper
3. The stages of the lesson
a. The old lesson check-up(1)
Check ss preparations
b. The new lesson

318

Teachers activities
*Warm-up(6)
Ask ss to play the game Matching

Students activities

Three groups play on the stage


* Matching:
tidy tidied
find found
see saw
fall fell
hear heard

Remark the game and present the new


lesson
1. Present perfect with yet and
already
(20) - Exercise 1, 2
Introduce the first content of the lesson
Ask ss to tell the forms of the verbs in past
participle forms: tidy, find, see, fall, hear

Observe and listen

Ask ss to look at the model sentence and


explain the aim
Ask ss to use the model sentence to
complete the dialogue
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Observe and listen

Ask ss to do the same with exercise 2 but


make questions and answers about the
flights

Listen and tell


*Key :
tidy tidied tidied
find found found
see saw seen
fall fell fallen
hear heard heard

Individualwork
Listen and correct
Listen and copy
1. Exercise 1
* Answers:
1) I have already done it
2) I havent tidied it yet
3) I have already turned it off
4) I have already called her

Listen and look at the schedules


319

Guide ss to do exercise 2
Ask ss to do exercise 2
Ask some ss to give out their answers
Remark and correct

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
2. Exercise 2
* Answers: Ss answers

* Comparison of present perfect with


past simple(15) -( Exercise 3,4)
Ask ss to look at the table, the model
sentences and present the aim
Present compare the two tenses
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to practice
Ask ss to work in pairs
Ask ss to answer
Ask ss to remark andcorrect
Remark and give out the answers

Ask ss to look at the model sentences and


present the aim
Ask ss to look at the model sentences and
guide ss to do the exercise
Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to
Ask ss to read their sentences
Ask ss to correct
Remark and correct

Listen and answer

Pairwork
3. Exercise 3
* Keys:
a) finished action
b) incomplete action
c) finished action
d) incomplete action
e) finished action
f) finished action
g) incomplete action
Observe and listen

Do on the drafting paper


Listen and correct
Listen and copy
4. Exercise 4.
* Keys:
1) Haveseen
didsee
saw
2) havent had
3) were
4) Haveheard
320

5) happened
6) had
7) fell
8) broke
9) Hasarrived
has
did arrive
arrived

c. Feed-back (2)
What is the main content of the lesson?
d. Homework(2)
- Do the exercises again in the book
- Review all vocabulary and grammar
- Prerpare for the next period: Correct the second term-test
* Nhn xt rt kinh nghim sau tit dy
+ Thi gian ca ton bi:.....

+ Thi gian ca tng phn:..

+ Ni dung kin thc: .

.....
.
.
+ Phng php: ..
.

321

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi